IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946


Problem Determination and Service Guide

IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946


Problem Determination and Service Guide

Note: Before using this information and the product it supports, read the general information in Appendix B, “Notices,” on page 213
and the IBM Safety Information, IBM Environmental Notices and User’s Guide, and the IBM Warranty and Support Information
document on the IBM System x Documentation CD.

First Edition (March 2009)

© Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 2009.
US Government Users Restricted Rights – Use, duplication or disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract
with IBM Corp.
Contents
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii. . . . . . . . .
Guidelines for trained service technicians . . . . . . .
viii . . . . . . . .
Inspecting for unsafe conditions . . . . . . . . .
viii . . . . . . . .
Guidelines for servicing electrical equipment . . . . .
viii . . . . . . . .
Safety statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x

Chapter 1. Start here. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Diagnosing a problem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Undocumented problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Chapter 2. Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Related documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Notices and statements in this document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Features and specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Server controls, LEDs, and power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Operator information panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Light path diagnostics panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Server power features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Internal LEDs, connectors, and jumpers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
System-board internal connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
System-board external connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
System-board switches and jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
System-board LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
System-board optional device connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Chapter 3. Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Diagnostic tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
POST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Error logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
POST error codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Checkout procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
About the checkout procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Performing the checkout procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Checkpoint codes (trained service technician only) . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Troubleshooting tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
CD/DVD drive problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
General problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Hard disk drive problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Hypervisor problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Intermittent problems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Keyboard, mouse, or pointing-device problems . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Memory problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Microprocessor problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Monitor and video problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Optional-device problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Power problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Serial-device problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
ServerGuide problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Software problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Universal Serial Bus (USB) port problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Video problems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009 iii

 Light path diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Light path diagnostics LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Power-supply LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
System pulse LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Diagnostic programs and messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Running the diagnostic programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Diagnostic text messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Viewing the test log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Diagnostic messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Recovering the server firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Automated boot recovery (ABR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Three boot failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
System event log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Solving power problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Solving Ethernet controller problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Solving undetermined problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Problem determination tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Chapter 4. Parts listing, System x3550 M2 Type 7946 . . . . . . . . . 111

Replaceable server components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Consumable parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Power cords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Chapter 4. Removing and replacing server components . . . . . . . . 119

Installation guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
System reliability guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Working inside the server with the power on . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Handling static-sensitive devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Returning a device or component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Removing and replacing consumable parts and Tier 1 CRUs . . . . . . . 122
Removing the cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Installing the cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Removing the microprocessor 2 air baffle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Installing the microprocessor 2 air baffle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Removing the DIMM air baffle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Installing the DIMM air baffle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Removing an adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Installing an adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Removing the SAS/SATA RAID riser-card assembly . . . . . . . . . . 129
Installing the SAS/SATA RAID riser-card assembly . . . . . . . . . . 130
Removing a hot-swap hard disk drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Installing a hot-swap hard disk drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Removing a CD/DVD drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Installing a CD/DVD drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Removing the CD/DVD cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Installing the CD/DVD cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Removing a memory module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Installing a memory module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Removing an IBM ServeRAID-BR10i SAS/SATA Controller . . . . . . . 144
Installing an IBM ServeRAID-BR10i SAS/SATA Controller . . . . . . . . 145
Removing an optional IBM ServeRAID-MR10i SAS/SATA Controller . . . . 147
Installing an optional IBM ServeRAID-MR10i SAS/SATA Controller . . . . 148
Removing a USB embedded hypervisor flash device . . . . . . . . . 150
Installing a USB embedded hypervisor flash device . . . . . . . . . . 151
Removing a hot-swap power supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Installing a hot-swap power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

iv IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
 Removing a hot-swap fan assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Installing a hot-swap fan assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Removing the virtual media key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Installing the virtual media key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Removing the optional two-port Ethernet adapter . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Installing the optional two-port Ethernet adapter . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Removing the PCI riser-card bracket from the riser card . . . . . . . . 161
Installing the PCI riser-card bracket to the riser card. . . . . . . . . . 161
Removing and replacing consumable parts and Tier 1 CRUs . . . . . . . 162
Removing a remotely installed RAID adapter battery . . . . . . . . . 162
Installing a RAID adapter battery remotely in the server . . . . . . . . 163
Removing the system battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Installing the system battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Removing and replacing Tier 2 CRUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Removing the bezel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Installing the bezel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Removing a PCI riser-card assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Installing a PCI riser-card assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Removing the hot-swap SAS/SATA hard disk drive backplane . . . . . . 171
Installing the hot-swap SAS/SATA hard disk drive backplane . . . . . . 172
Removing the operator information panel assembly . . . . . . . . . . 173
Installing the operator information panel assembly . . . . . . . . . . 174
Removing and replacing FRUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Removing the 240 VA safety cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Installing the 240 VA safety cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Removing a microprocessor and heat sink . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Installing a microprocessor and heat sink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Removing the heat sink retention module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Installing a heat sink retention module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Removing the system board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Installing the system board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

Chapter 5. Configuration information and instructions . . . . . . . . 187

Updating the firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Configuring the server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Using the ServerGuide Setup and Installation CD. . . . . . . . . . . 189
Using the Setup utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Using the Boot Manager program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Starting the backup server firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Using the integrated management module . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Using the embedded hypervisor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Using the remote presence capability and blue-screen capture . . . . . . 199
Enabling the Broadcom Gigabit Ethernet Utility program . . . . . . . . 201
Configuring the Gigabit Ethernet controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Using the LSI Configuration Utility program . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
IBM Advanced Settings Utility program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Updating IBM Systems Director . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Updating the Universal Unique Identifier (UUID) . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Updating the DMI/SMBIOS data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

Appendix A. Getting help and technical assistance . . . . . . . . . . 211

Before you call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Using the documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Getting help and information from the World Wide Web . . . . . . . . . 211
Software service and support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Hardware service and support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

Contents v
 IBM Taiwan product service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

Appendix B. Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
213
Trademarks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
213
Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
214
Electronic emission notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
215
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) statement . . . . . . . .
215
Industry Canada Class A emission compliance statement . . . . . . . .
215
Avis de conformité à la réglementation d’Industrie Canada . . . . . . .
215
Australia and New Zealand Class A statement . . . . . . . . . . . .
215
United Kingdom telecommunications safety requirement . . . . . . . .
215
European Union EMC Directive conformance statement . . . . . . . .
215
Taiwanese Class A warning statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
216
Chinese Class A warning statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
216
Japanese Voluntary Control Council for Interference (VCCI) statement 216
Korean Class A warning statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

vi IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Safety
Before installing this product, read the Safety Information.

Antes de instalar este produto, leia as Informações de Segurança.

Pred instalací tohoto produktu si prectete prírucku bezpecnostních instrukcí.

Læs sikkerhedsforskrifterne, før du installerer dette produkt.

Lees voordat u dit product installeert eerst de veiligheidsvoorschriften.

Ennen kuin asennat tämän tuotteen, lue turvaohjeet kohdasta Safety Information.

Avant d’installer ce produit, lisez les consignes de sécurité.

Vor der Installation dieses Produkts die Sicherheitshinweise lesen.

Prima di installare questo prodotto, leggere le Informazioni sulla Sicurezza.

Les sikkerhetsinformasjonen (Safety Information) før du installerer dette produktet.

Antes de instalar este produto, leia as Informações sobre Segurança.

Antes de instalar este producto, lea la información de seguridad.

Läs säkerhetsinformationen innan du installerar den här produkten.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009 vii

Guidelines for trained service technicians
This section contains information for trained service technicians.

Inspecting for unsafe conditions

Use the information in this section to help you identify potential unsafe conditions in
an IBM product that you are working on. Each IBM product, as it was designed and
manufactured, has required safety items to protect users and service technicians
from injury. The information in this section addresses only those items. Use good
judgment to identify potential unsafe conditions that might be caused by non-IBM
alterations or attachment of non-IBM features or options that are not addressed in
this section. If you identify an unsafe condition, you must determine how serious the
hazard is and whether you must correct the problem before you work on the
product.

Consider the following conditions and the safety hazards that they present:
v Electrical hazards, especially primary power. Primary voltage on the frame can
cause serious or fatal electrical shock.
v Explosive hazards, such as a damaged CRT face or a bulging capacitor.
v Mechanical hazards, such as loose or missing hardware.

To inspect the product for potential unsafe conditions, complete the following steps:
1. Make sure that the power is off and the power cord is disconnected.
2. Make sure that the exterior cover is not damaged, loose, or broken, and
observe any sharp edges.
3. Check the power cord:
v Make sure that the third-wire ground connector is in good condition. Use a
meter to measure third-wire ground continuity for 0.1 ohm or less between
the external ground pin and the frame ground.
v Make sure that the power cord is the correct type, as specified in “Power
cords” on page 116.
v Make sure that the insulation is not frayed or worn.
4. Remove the cover.
5. Check for any obvious non-IBM alterations. Use good judgment as to the safety
of any non-IBM alterations.
6. Check inside the server for any obvious unsafe conditions, such as metal filings,
contamination, water or other liquid, or signs of fire or smoke damage.
7. Check for worn, frayed, or pinched cables.
8. Make sure that the power-supply cover fasteners (screws or rivets) have not
been removed or tampered with.

Guidelines for servicing electrical equipment

Observe the following guidelines when servicing electrical equipment:
v Check the area for electrical hazards such as moist floors, nongrounded power
extension cords, power surges, and missing safety grounds.
v Use only approved tools and test equipment. Some hand tools have handles that
are covered with a soft material that does not provide insulation from live
electrical currents.
v Regularly inspect and maintain your electrical hand tools for safe operational
condition. Do not use worn or broken tools or testers.

viii IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v Do not touch the reflective surface of a dental mirror to a live electrical circuit.
The surface is conductive and can cause personal injury or equipment damage if
it touches a live electrical circuit.
v Some rubber floor mats contain small conductive fibers to decrease electrostatic
discharge. Do not use this type of mat to protect yourself from electrical shock.
v Do not work alone under hazardous conditions or near equipment that has
hazardous voltages.
v Locate the emergency power-off (EPO) switch, disconnecting switch, or electrical
outlet so that you can turn off the power quickly in the event of an electrical
accident.
v Disconnect all power before you perform a mechanical inspection, work near
power supplies, or remove or install main units.
v Before you work on the equipment, disconnect the power cord. If you cannot
disconnect the power cord, have the customer power-off the wall box that
supplies power to the equipment and lock the wall box in the off position.
v Never assume that power has been disconnected from a circuit. Check it to
make sure that it has been disconnected.
v If you have to work on equipment that has exposed electrical circuits, observe
the following precautions:
– Make sure that another person who is familiar with the power-off controls is
near you and is available to turn off the power if necessary.
– When you are working with powered-on electrical equipment, use only one
hand. Keep the other hand in your pocket or behind your back to avoid
creating a complete circuit that could cause an electrical shock.
– When you use a tester, set the controls correctly and use the approved probe
leads and accessories for that tester.
– Stand on a suitable rubber mat to insulate you from grounds such as metal
floor strips and equipment frames.
v Use extreme care when you measure high voltages.
v To ensure proper grounding of components such as power supplies, pumps,
blowers, fans, and motor generators, do not service these components outside of
their normal operating locations.
v If an electrical accident occurs, use caution, turn off the power, and send another
person to get medical aid.

Safety ix
Safety statements
Important:

Each caution and danger statement in this document is labeled with a number. This
number is used to cross reference an English-language caution or danger
statement with translated versions of the caution or danger statement in the Safety
Information document.

For example, if a caution statement is labeled "Statement 1," translations for that
caution statement are in the Safety Information document under "Statement 1."

Be sure to read all caution and danger statements in this document before you
perform the procedures. Read any additional safety information that comes with the
server or optional device before you install the device.

Attention: Use No. 26 AWG or larger UL-listed or CSA certified

telecommunication line cord.

x IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Statement 1:

DANGER

Electrical current from power, telephone, and communication cables is

hazardous.

To avoid a shock hazard:

v Do not connect or disconnect any cables or perform installation,
maintenance, or reconfiguration of this product during an electrical
storm.
v Connect all power cords to a properly wired and grounded electrical
outlet.
v Connect to properly wired outlets any equipment that will be attached to
this product.
v When possible, use one hand only to connect or disconnect signal
cables.
v Never turn on any equipment when there is evidence of fire, water, or
structural damage.
v Disconnect the attached power cords, telecommunications systems,
networks, and modems before you open the device covers, unless
instructed otherwise in the installation and configuration procedures.
v Connect and disconnect cables as described in the following table when
installing, moving, or opening covers on this product or attached
devices.

To Connect: To Disconnect:

1. Turn everything OFF. 1. Turn everything OFF.

2. First, attach all cables to devices. 2. First, remove power cords from outlet.
3. Attach signal cables to connectors. 3. Remove signal cables from connectors.
4. Attach power cords to outlet. 4. Remove all cables from devices.
5. Turn device ON.

Safety xi
 Statement 2:

CAUTION:
When replacing the lithium battery, use only IBM Part Number 33F8354 or an
equivalent type battery recommended by the manufacturer. If your system has
a module containing a lithium battery, replace it only with the same module
type made by the same manufacturer. The battery contains lithium and can
explode if not properly used, handled, or disposed of.

Do not:
v Throw or immerse into water
v Heat to more than 100°C (212°F)
v Repair or disassemble

Dispose of the battery as required by local ordinances or regulations.

xii IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Statement 3:

CAUTION:
When laser products (such as CD-ROMs, DVD drives, fiber optic devices, or
transmitters) are installed, note the following:
v Do not remove the covers. Removing the covers of the laser product could
result in exposure to hazardous laser radiation. There are no serviceable
parts inside the device.
v Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than
those specified herein might result in hazardous radiation exposure.

DANGER
Some laser products contain an embedded Class 3A or Class 3B laser
diode. Note the following.

Laser radiation when open. Do not stare into the beam, do not view directly
with optical instruments, and avoid direct exposure to the beam.

Class 1 Laser Product

Laser Klasse 1
Laser Klass 1
Luokan 1 Laserlaite
Appareil A` Laser de Classe 1

Safety xiii
 Statement 4:

≥ 18 kg (39.7 lb) ≥ 32 kg (70.5 lb) ≥ 55 kg (121.2 lb)

CAUTION:
Use safe practices when lifting.

Statement 5:

CAUTION:
The power control button on the device and the power switch on the power
supply do not turn off the electrical current supplied to the device. The device
also might have more than one power cord. To remove all electrical current
from the device, ensure that all power cords are disconnected from the power
source.

2
1

xiv IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Statement 8:

CAUTION:
Never remove the cover on a power supply or any part that has the following
label attached.

Hazardous voltage, current, and energy levels are present inside any
component that has this label attached. There are no serviceable parts inside
these components. If you suspect a problem with one of these parts, contact
a service technician.

Statement 26:

CAUTION:
Do not place any object on top of rack-mounted devices.

Attention: This server is suitable for use on an IT power distribution system

whose maximum phase-to-phase voltage is 240 V under any distribution fault
condition.

Important: This product is not suitable for use with visual display workplace devices
according to Clause 2 of the German Ordinance for Work with Visual Display Units.

Safety xv
xvi IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Chapter 1. Start here
You can solve many problems without outside assistance by following the
troubleshooting procedures in this Problem Determination and Service Guide and
on the IBM Web site. This document describes the diagnostic tests that you can
perform, troubleshooting procedures, and explanations of error messages and error
codes. The documentation that comes with your operating system and software
also contains troubleshooting information.

Diagnosing a problem
Before you contact IBM or an approved warranty service provider, follow these
procedures in the order in which they are presented to diagnose a problem with
your server:
1. Determine what has changed.
Determine whether any of the following items were added, removed, replaced,
or updated before the problem occurred:
v IBM System x Server Firmware (formerly BIOS firmware)
v Device drivers
v Firmware
v Hardware components
v Software
If possible, return the server to the condition it was in before the problem
occurred.
2. Collect data.
Thorough data collection is necessary for diagnosing hardware and software
problems.
a. Document error codes and system-board LEDs.
v System error codes: See “POST error codes” on page 27 for information
about a specific error code.
v See “System-board LEDs” on page 20 for the location of the
system-board LEDs.
v Software or operating-system error codes: See the documentation for
the software or operating system for information about a specific error
code. See the manufacturer's Web site for documentation.
v Light path diagnostics LEDs: See “Light path diagnostics LEDs” on
page 58 for information about LEDs that are lit.
b. Collect system data.
Run Dynamic System Analysis (DSA) Preboot diagnostics program to collect
information about the hardware, firmware, software, and operating system.
Have this information available when you contact IBM or an approved
warranty service provider. See “Diagnostic programs and messages” on
page 66 for the instructions to run the DSA Preboot program.
If you need to download the latest version of DSA Preboot, go to
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008&lndocid=SERV-DSA or complete the
following steps.

Note: Changes are made periodically to the IBM Web site. The actual
procedure might vary slightly from what is described in this document.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009 1

 1) Go to http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/.
2) Under Product support, click System x.
3) Under Popular links, click Software and device drivers.
4) Under Related downloads, click Dynamic System Analysis (DSA).
For information about DSA command-line options, go to
http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/toolsctr/v1r0/index.jsp?topic=/
com.ibm.xseries.tools.doc/erep_tools_dsa.html or complete the following
steps:
1) Go to http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/toolsctr/v1r0/index.jsp.
2) In the navigation pane, click IBM System x and BladeCenter Tools
Center.
3) Click Tools reference > Error reporting and analysis tools > IBM
Dynamic System Analysis.
3. Follow the problem-resolution procedures.
The four problem-resolution procedures are presented in the order in which they
are most likely to solve your problem. Follow these procedures in the order in
which they are presented:
a. Check for and apply code updates.
Most problems that appear to be caused by faulty hardware are actually
caused by the server firmware (formerly BIOS firmware), device firmware, or
device drivers that are not at the latest levels.
1) Determine the existing code levels.
In DSA, click Firmware/VPD to view system firmware levels, or click
Software to view operating-system levels.
2) Download and install updates of code that is not at the latest level.
Important: Some cluster solutions require specific code levels or
coordinated code updates. If the device is part of a cluster solution,
verify that the latest level of code is supported for the cluster solution
before you update the code.
To display a list of available updates for your server, go to
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008&lndocid=MIGR-4JTS2T or complete the
following steps.

Note: Changes are made periodically to the IBM Web site. The actual
procedure might vary slightly from what is described in this document.
a) Go to http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/.
b) Under Product support, click System x.
c) Under Popular links, click Software and device drivers.
d) Click System x3550 M2 to display the list of downloadable files for
the server.
You can install code updates that are packaged as an UpdateXpress
System Pack or UpdateXpress CD image. An UpdateXpress System
Pack contains an integration-tested bundle of online firmware and
device-driver updates for your server.
Be sure to separately install any listed critical updates that have release
dates that are later than the release date of the UpdateXpress System
Pack or UpdateXpress image.

2 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
 When you click an update, an information page is displayed, including a
list of the problems that the update fixes. Review this list for your
specific problem; however, even if your problem is not listed, installing
the update might solve the problem.
b. Check for and correct an incorrect configuration.
If the server is incorrectly configured, a system function can fail to work
when you enable it; if you make an incorrect change to the server
configuration, a system function that has been enabled can stop working.
1) Make sure that all installed hardware and software are supported.
See http://www.ibm.com/servers/eserver/serverproven/compat/us/ to
verify that the server supports the installed operating system, optional
devices, and software levels. If any hardware or software component is
not supported, uninstall it to determine whether it is causing the problem.
You must remove nonsupported hardware before you contact IBM or an
approved warranty service provider for support.
2) Make sure that the server, operating system, and software are
installed and configured correctly.
Many configuration problems are caused by loose power or signal
cables or incorrectly seated adapters. You might be able to solve the
problem by turning off the server, reconnecting cables, reseating
adapters, and turning the server back on. See “Checkout procedure” on
page 37 for the instructions to perform the checkout procedures.
If the problem is associated with a specific function (for example, if a
RAID hard disk drive is marked offline in the RAID array), see the
documentation for the associated controller and management or
controlling software to verify that the controller is correctly configured.
Problem determination information is available for many devices such as
RAID and network adapters.
For problems with operating systems or IBM software or devices,
complete the following steps.

Note: Changes are made periodically to the IBM Web site. The actual
procedure might vary slightly from what is described in this document.
a) Go to http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/.
b) Under Product support, click System x.
c) From the Product family list, select System x3550 M2.
d) Under Support & downloads, click Documentation, Install, and
Use to search for related documentation.
c. Check for service bulletins.
IBM service bulletins document known problems and suggested solutions.
To search for service bulletins, complete the following steps.

Note: Changes are made periodically to the IBM Web site. The actual
procedure might vary slightly from what is described in this document.
1) Go to http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/.
2) Under Product support, click System x.
3) From the Product family list, select System x3550 M2.
4) Under Support & downloads, click Troubleshoot.
d. Check for and replace defective hardware.
If a hardware component is not operating within specifications, it can cause
unpredictable results. Most hardware failures are reported as error codes in

Chapter 1. Start here 3

 a system or operating-system log. See “Troubleshooting tables” on page 39
and Chapter 4, “Removing and replacing server components,” on page 119
for more information. Hardware errors are also indicated by light path
diagnostics LEDs (see “Light path diagnostics LEDs” on page 58 for more
information).
Troubleshooting procedures are also provided on the IBM Web site. A single
problem might cause multiple symptoms. Follow the diagnostic procedure for
the most obvious symptom. If that procedure does not diagnose the
problem, use the procedure for another symptom, if possible. To locate
troubleshooting procedures for your server, complete the following steps.

Note: Changes are made periodically to the IBM Web site. The actual
procedure might vary slightly from what is described in this document.
1) Go to http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/.
2) Under Product support, click System x.
3) From the Product family list, select System x3550 M2.
4) Under Support & downloads, click Troubleshoot.
5) Under Diagnostic, select the troubleshooting procedure for the symptom
that you are observing.
For more troubleshooting information, see Chapter 3, “Diagnostics,” on page
23.
If the problem remains, contact IBM or an approved warranty service
provider for assistance with additional problem determination and possible
hardware replacement. To open an online service request, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/electronic/. Be prepared to provide information
about any error codes and collected data.

Undocumented problems
If you have completed the diagnostic procedure and the problem remains, the
problem might not have been previously identified by IBM. After you have verified
that all code is at the latest level, all hardware and software configurations are valid,
and no light path diagnostics LEDs or log entries indicate a hardware component
failure, contact IBM or an approved warranty service provider for assistance. To
open an online service request, go to http://www.ibm.com/support/electronic/. Be
prepared to provide information about any error codes and collected data and the
problem determination procedures that you have used.

4 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Chapter 2. Introduction
This Problem Determination and Service Guide contains information to help you
solve problems that might occur in your IBM® System x3550 M2 Type 7946 server.
It describes the diagnostic tools that come with the server, error codes and
suggested actions, and instructions for replacing failing components.

The most recent version of this document is available at http://www.ibm.com/

systems/support/.

The four types of replaceable components are:

v Consumables: Purchase and replacement of consumables (components, such
as batteries and printer cartridges, that have depleting life) is your responsibility.
If IBM acquires or installs a consumable component at your request, you will be
charged for the service. For a list of consumable parts, see “Consumable parts”
on page 114.
v Tier 1 customer replaceable unit (CRU): Replacement of Tier 1 CRUs is your
responsibility. If IBM installs a Tier 1 CRU at your request, you will be charged for
the installation.
v Tier 2 customer replaceable unit: You may install a Tier 2 CRU yourself or
request IBM to install it, at no additional charge, under the type of warranty
service that is designated for your server.
v Field replaceable unit (FRU): FRUs must be installed only by Trained service
technicians.

For a list of replaceable components for the server, see “Replaceable server
components” on page 111.

For information about the terms of the warranty and getting service and assistance,
see the Warranty and Support Information document on the IBM System x
Documentation CD.

Related documentation
In addition to this document, the following documentation also comes with the
server:
v Installation and User’s Guide
This document is in Portable Document Format (PDF) on the IBM System x
Documentation CD. It provides general information about setting up and cabling
the server, including information about features, and how to configure the server.
It also contains detailed instructions for installing, removing, and connecting
some optional devices that the server supports.
v Rack Installation Instructions
This printed document contains instructions for installing the server in a rack.
v Safety Information
This document is in PDF on the IBM System x Documentation CD. It contains
translated caution and danger statements. Each caution and danger statement
that appears in the documentation has a number that you can use to locate the
corresponding statement in your language in the Safety Information document.
v Warranty and Support Information
This document is in PDF on the IBM System x Documentation CD. It contains
information about the terms of the warranty and getting service and assistance.
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009 5
 v Environmental Notices and User Guide
This document is in PDF format on the IBM System x Documentation CD. It
contains translated environmental notices.

Depending on the server model, additional documentation might be included on the

IBM System x Documentation CD.

The System x and xSeries Tools Center is an online information center that
contains information about tools for updating, managing, and deploying firmware,
device drivers, and operating systems. The System x and xSeries Tools Center is at
http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/toolsctr/v1r0/index.jsp.

The server might have features that are not described in the documentation that
comes with the server. The documentation might be updated occasionally to include
information about those features, or technical updates might be available to provide
additional information that is not included in the server documentation. These
updates are available from the IBM Web site. To check for updated documentation
and technical updates, complete the following steps.

Note: Changes are made periodically to the IBM Web site. The actual procedure
might vary slightly from what is described in this document.
1. Go to http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/.
2. Under Product support, click System x.
3. Under Popular links, click Publications lookup.
4. From the Product family menu, select System x3550 M2 and click Go.

Notices and statements in this document

The caution and danger statements that appear in this document are also in the
multilingual Safety Information document, which is on the IBM System x
Documentation CD. Each statement is numbered for reference to the corresponding
statement in the Safety Information document.

The following notices and statements are used in this document:

v Note: These notices provide important tips, guidance, or advice.
v Important: These notices provide information or advice that might help you avoid
inconvenient or problem situations.
v Attention: These notices indicate potential damage to programs, devices, or
data. An attention notice is placed just before the instruction or situation in which
damage might occur.
v Caution: These statements indicate situations that can be potentially hazardous
to you. A caution statement is placed just before the description of a potentially
hazardous procedure step or situation.
v Danger: These statements indicate situations that can be potentially lethal or
extremely hazardous to you. A danger statement is placed just before the
description of a potentially lethal or extremely hazardous procedure step or
situation.

6 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Features and specifications
The following information is a summary of the features and specifications of the
server. Depending on the server model, some features might not be available, or
some specifications might not apply.

Chapter 2. Introduction 7
Table 1. Features and specifications
Microprocessor: Size: Heat output:
v Supports up to two Intel® Xeon™ v Height: 43 mm (1.69 inches, 1U)
microprocessors (one installed), v Depth: 711 mm (28 inches) Approximate heat output:
v Width: 440 mm (17.3 inches) v Minimum configuration: 662 Btu per hour
dual-core (two cores per microprocessor
v Maximum weight: 15.4 kg (34 lb) when (194 watts)
with 4 MB shared among cores) or
fully configured v Maximum configuration: 2302 Btu per
quad-core (four cores per
hour (675 watts)
microprocessor with 8 MB shared
Integrated functions:
among cores)
v Integrated Management Module (IMM), Electrical input:
v Level-2 cache which provides service processor v Sine-wave input (47 - 63 Hz) required
v QuickPath Interconnect (QPI) links control and monitoring functions, video v Input voltage low range:
speed up to 6.4 GT per second controller, and (when the optional – Minimum: 100 V ac
virtual media key is installed) remote – Maximum: 127 V ac
Note: keyboard, video, mouse, and remote v Input voltage high range:
v Use the Setup utility program to hard disk drive capabilities – Minimum: 200 V ac
determine the type and speed of the v Broadcom BCM5709 Gb Ethernet – Maximum: 240 V ac
microprocessors. controller with TCP/IP Offload Engine v Input kilovolt-amperes (kVA),
v For a list of supported microprocessors, (TOE) and Wake on LAN® support approximately:
see http://www.ibm.com/servers/eserver/ v Five Universal Serial Bus (USB) 2.0 – Minimum: 0.194 kVA
serverproven/compat/us/. ports (two front and two rear of the – Maximum: 0.700 kVA
chassis, and one on the SAS/SATA
Memory: RAID riser card in which the optional Video controller (integrated into IMM):
v Minimum: 1 GB USB flash device with embedded v Matrox G200 (two analog ports - one
v Maximum: 128 GB hypervisor software is installed) front and one rear that can be connected
v Type: PC3-10600R-999 (single-rank or v Four Ethernet ports (two on system at the same time)
double-rank), 800, 1067, and 1333 MHz, board and two additional ports when Note: The maximum video resolution is
ECC, DDR3 registered SDRAM DIMMs the optional IBM Dual-Port 1 Gb 1280 x 1024 at 75 Hz.
only Ethernet Daughter Card is installed) – SVGA compatible video controller
v Slots: 16 dual inline v One System Management RJ-45 on – DDR2 250 MHz SDRAM video
v Supports 1 GB, 2 GB, 4 GB, and 8 GB the rear to connect to a systems memory controller
(when available) DIMMs management network. This system – Avocent Digital Video Compression
management connector is dedicated to – Video memory is not expandable
SATA optical drives (depending on your the IMM functions. This connector is Notes:
model): active with or without the optional IBM
Virtual Media Key installed. 1. Power consumption and heat output
v CD-RW/DVD-ROM combo (on standard vary depending on the number and type
models) v One serial port
of optional features installed and the
v DVD-ROM (optional) RAID controllers: power-management optional features in
v Multi-burner (optional) use.
v A ServeRAID-BR10i SAS/SATA adapter
that provides RAID levels 0, 1, and 1E 2. The sound levels were measured in
Hard disk drive expansion bays (comes standard on some hot-swap controlled acoustical environments
(depending on the model): SAS and hot-swap SATA models). according to the procedures specified by
v Six 2.5-inch hot-swap SAS or hot-swap the American National Standards
v An optional ServeRAID-MR10i
SATA hard disk drive bays Institute (ANSI) S12.10 and ISO 7779
SAS/SATA adapter that provides RAID
and are reported in accordance with ISO
levels 0, 1, 5, 6, 10, 50, and 60 can
PCI expansion slots: 9296. Actual sound-pressure levels in a
also be ordered.
given location might exceed the average
Supports two PCI riser slots: values stated because of room
Acoustical noise emissions:
v Slot 1 supports low-profile cards (PCI reflections and other nearby noise
v Sound power, idling: 6.1 bels maximum
Express Gen2 x16 or PCI-X 1.0a sources. The noise emission level stated
v Sound power, operating: 6.1 bels
64-bit/133 MHz ). in the declared (upper limit)
maximum
v Slot 2 supports half-length, full-height sound-power level, in bels, for a random
cards (PCI Express Gen2 x16 or PCI-X Environment: sample of system.
1.0a 64-bit/133 MHz). v Air temperature:
– Server on: 10°C to 35°C (50.0°F to
Power supply:
95.0°F); altitude: 0 to 914 m (2998.7
v One power supply standard ft)
v Maximum of two 675-watt ac (110 or – Server off: -40°C to 60°C
220 V ac auto-sensing) hot-swap power (-104°F to 140°F); maximum
supplies for redundancy support altitude: 2133 m (6998.0 ft)
v Humidity:
Hot-swap fans: – Server on: 8% to 80%
– Server off: 8% to 80%
The server comes standard with six
dual-motor hot-swap fans.

8 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Server controls, LEDs, and power
This section describes the controls and light-emitting diodes (LEDs) and how to turn
the server on and off. For the location of the LEDs on the system board, see
“System-board LEDs” on page 20.

Front view
The following illustration shows the controls, LEDs, and connectors on the front of
the server.

v Rack release latches: Press the latches on each front side of the server to
remove the server from the rack.
v Hard disk drive activity LEDs: This LED is used on SAS or SATA hard disk
drives. Each hot-swap hard disk drive has an activity LED, and when this LED is
flashing, it indicates that the drive is in use.
v Hard disk drive status LEDs: This LED is used on SAS or SATA hard disk
drives. When this LED is lit, it indicates that the drive has failed. If an optional
IBM ServeRAID™ controller is installed in the server, when this LED is flashing
slowly (one flash per second), it indicates that the drive is being rebuilt. When the
LED is flashing rapidly (three flashes per second), it indicates that the controller
is identifying the drive.
v CD/DVD eject button: Press this button to release a DVD or CD from the
CD/DVD drive.
v CD/DVD drive activity LED: When this LED is lit, it indicates that the CD/DVD
drive is in use.
v Operator information panel: This panel contains controls and LEDs that provide
information about the status of the server.
v Operator information panel release latch: Slide the blue release latch to the
left to pull out the light path diagnostics panel and view the light path diagnostics
LEDs and buttons. See “Light path diagnostics panel” on page 11 for more
information about the light path diagnostics.
v Video connector: Connect a monitor to this connector. The video connectors on
the front and rear of the server can be used simultaneously.
v USB connectors: Connect a USB device, such as a USB mouse, keyboard, or
other device to any of these connectors.

Chapter 2. Introduction 9
Operator information panel
The following illustration shows the controls and LEDs on the operator information
panel.

v Power-control button and power-on LED: Press this button to turn the server
on and off manually or to wake the server from a reduced-power state. The
states of the power-on LED are as follows:
Off: AC power is not present, or the power supply or the LED itself has failed.
Flashing rapidly (4 times per second): The server is turned off and is not
ready to be turned on. The power-control button is disabled. This will last
approximately 1 to 3 minutes.
Flashing slowly (once per second): The server is turned off and is ready to
be turned on. You can press the power-control button to turn on the server.
Lit: The server is turned on.
Fading on and off: The server is in a reduced-power state. To wake the
server, press the power-control button or use the IMM Web interface. See
“Logging on to the Web interface” on page 201 for information on logging on
to the IMM Web interface.
v Ethernet activity LEDs: When any of these LEDs is lit, they indicate that the
server is transmitting to or receiving signals from the Ethernet LAN that is
connected to the Ethernet port that corresponds to that LED.
v System-locator button/LED: Use this blue LED to visually locate the server
among other servers. This LED is also used as a presence detection button. You
can use IBM Systems Director to light this LED remotely. This LED is controlled
by the IMM. When you press the System-locator button, the LED will blink and it
will continue to blink until you press it again to turn it off. Doing this can help in
locating the server (from the rear of the server rack) among the other servers.
v System-information LED: When this amber LED is lit, it indicates that a
noncritical event has occurred. Check the error log for additional information. See
“Error logs” on page 25 for information about the error logs.
v System-error LED: When this amber LED is lit, it indicates that a system error
has occurred. A system-error LED is also on the rear of the server. An LED on
the light path diagnostics panel on the operator information panel is also lit to
help isolate the error. This LED is controlled by the IMM.
v Hard drive activity LED: When this green LED is lit, it indicates that one of the
hard disk drives is in use.
Notes:
1. For a SAS drive, a hard disk drive activity LED is shown in two places: on the
hard disk drive and on the operator information panel.
2. For a SATA drive, hard disk drive activity is indicated only by the hard disk
drive activity LED on the operator information panel.

10 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Light path diagnostics panel
The light path diagnostics panel is located on the top of the operator information
panel.

Note: The system service label on the underside of the cover also provides
information about the location of the light path diagnostics LEDs.

To access the light path diagnostics panel, slide the blue release latch on the
operator panel to the left. Pull forward on the panel until the hinge of the operator
panel is free of the server chassis. Then pull down on the panel, so that you can
view the light path diagnostics panel information.

Note: When you slide the light path diagnostics panel out of the server to check
the LEDs or checkpoint codes, do not run the server continuously with light path
diagnostics panel outside of the server. The panel should only be outside of the
server a short time. The light path diagnostics panel must remain in the server
when the server is running to ensure proper cooling.

The following illustration shows the LEDs and controls on the light path diagnostics
panel.

v Remind button: This button places the system-error LED on the front panel into
Remind mode. In Remind mode, the system-error LED flashes every 2 seconds
until the problem is corrected, the system is restarted, or a new problem occurs.
By placing the system-error LED indicator in Remind mode, you acknowledge
that you are aware of the last failure but will not take immediate action to correct
the problem. The remind function is controlled by the IMM.

Chapter 2. Introduction 11
 v NMI button: Press this button to force a nonmaskable interrupt to the
microprocessor. It allows you to blue screen the server and take a memory dump
(use this button only when directed by the IBM service support).
v Checkpoint code display: This display provides a checkpoint code that
indicates the point at which the system stopped during the boot block and POST.
A checkpoint code is either a byte or a word value that is produced by UEFI. The
display does not provide error codes or suggest components to be replaced.
Checkpoint codes can be used by IBM service and support for more in-depth
troubleshooting. For more detail information and checkpoint codes, see
“Checkpoint codes (trained service technician only)” on page 38 for more
information.
v Reset button: Press this button to reset the server and run the power-on
self-test (POST). You might have to use a pen or the end of a straightened paper
clip to press the button. The Reset button is in the lower right-hand corner of the
light path diagnostics panel.

For additional information about the light path diagnostics panel LEDs, see “Light
path diagnostics LEDs” on page 58.

Rear view
The following illustration shows the connectors and LEDs on the rear of the server.

v PCI slot 1: Insert a low-profile PCI Express or PCI-X adapter into this slot.
Standard models of the server come with two PCI Express rise assemblies
installed. You can purchase an optional PCI-X riser-card assembly with a bracket
if you want to install a PCI-X adapter in this slot.
v PCI slot 2: Insert a half-length, full-height PCI Express or PCI-X adapter into this
slot. Standard models of the server come with two PCI Express rise assemblies
installed. You can purchase an optional PCI-X riser card assembly with a bracket
if you want to install a PCI-X adapter in this slot.
v Power connector: Connect the power cord to this connector.
v AC power LED: Each hot-swap power supply has an ac power LED and a dc
power LED. When the ac power LED is lit, it indicates that sufficient power is
coming into the power supply through the power cord. During typical operation,
both the ac and dc power LEDs are lit. For any other combination of LEDs, see
“Power-supply LEDs” on page 64.
v DC power LED: Each hot-swap power supply has a dc power LED and an ac
power LED. When the dc power LED is lit, it indicates that the power supply is

12 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
 supplying adequate dc power to the system. During typical operation, both the ac
and dc power LEDs are lit. For any other combination of LEDs, see
“Power-supply LEDs” on page 64.
v System-error LED: When this LED is lit, it indicates that a system error has
occurred. An LED on the light path diagnostics panel is also lit to help isolate the
error.
v Power-on LED: When this LED is lit and not flashing, it indicates that the server
is turned on. The states of the power-on LED are as follows:
Off: AC power is not present, or the power supply or the LED itself has failed.
Flashing rapidly (4 times per second): The server is turned off and is not
ready to be turned on. The power-control button is disabled. This will last
approximately 1 to 3 minutes.
Flashing slowly (once per second): The server is turned off and is ready to
be turned on. You can press the power-control button to turn on the server.
Lit: The server is turned on.
Fading on and off: The server is in a reduced-power state. To wake the
server, press the power-control button or use the IMM Web interface. See
“Logging on to the Web interface” on page 201 for information on logging on
to the IMM Web interface.
v System-locator LED: Use this LED to visually locate the server among other
servers. You can use IBM Systems Director to light this LED remotely.
v Video connector: Connect a monitor to this connector. The video connectors on
the front and rear of the server can be used simultaneously.

Note: The maximum video resolution is 1280 x 1024 at 75 Hz.

v Serial connector: Connect a 9-pin serial device to this connector. The serial port
is shared with the integrated management module (IMM). The IMM can take
control of the shared serial port to perform text console redirection and to redirect
serial traffic, using Serial over LAN (SOL).
v USB connectors: Connect a USB device, such as a USB mouse, keyboard, or
other device to any of these connectors.
v Systems-management Ethernet connector: Use this connector to connect the
server to a network for full systems-management information control.
v Ethernet activity LEDs: When these LEDs are lit, they indicate that the server is
transmitting to or receiving signals from the Ethernet LAN that is connected to
the Ethernet port.
v Ethernet link LEDs: When these LEDs are lit, they indicate that there is an
active link connection on the 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX, or 1000BASE-TX
interface for the Ethernet port.
v Ethernet connectors: Use either of these connectors to connect the server to a
network.

Server power features

When the server is connected to an ac power source but is not turned on, the
operating system does not run, and all core logic except for the service processor
(the integrated management module) is shutdown; however, the server can respond
to requests from the service processor, such as a remote request to turn on the
server. The power-on LED flashes to indicate that the server is connected to ac
power but is not turned on.

Chapter 2. Introduction 13
 Turning on the server
Approximately 5 seconds after the server is connected to ac power, one or more
fans might start running to provide cooling while the server is connected to power
and the power-on button LED will blink quickly. Approximately 1 to 3 minutes after
the server is connected to ac power, the power-control button becomes active (the
power-on LED will blink slowly), and one or more fans might start running to provide
cooling while the server is connected to power. You can turn on the server by
pressing the power-control button.

The server can also be turned on in any of the following ways:

v If a power failure occurs while the server is turned on, the server will restart
automatically when power is restored.
v If your operating system supports the Wake on LAN feature, the Wake on LAN
feature can turn on the server.

Note: When 4 GB or more of memory (physical or logical) is installed, some

memory is reserved for various system resources and is unavailable to the
operating system. The amount of memory that is reserved for system resources
depends on the operating system, the configuration of the server, and the
configured PCI options.

Turning off the server

When you turn off the server and leave it connected to ac power, the server can
respond to requests from the service processor, such as a remote request to turn
on the server. While the server remains connected to ac power, one or more fans
might continue to run. To remove all power from the server, you must disconnect it
from the power source.

Some operating systems require an orderly shutdown before you turn off the server.
See your operating-system documentation for information about shutting down the
operating system.

Statement 5:

CAUTION:
The power control button on the device and the power switch on the power
supply do not turn off the electrical current supplied to the device. The device
also might have more than one power cord. To remove all electrical current
from the device, ensure that all power cords are disconnected from the power
source.

2
1
The server can be turned off in any of the following ways:
v You can turn off the server from the operating system, if your operating system
supports this feature. After an orderly shutdown of the operating system, the
server will turn off automatically.

14 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v You can press the power-control button to start an orderly shutdown of the
operating system and turn off the server, if your operating system supports this
feature.
v If the operating system stops functioning, you can press and hold the
power-control button for more than 4 seconds to turn off the server.
v The server can be turned off by Wake on LAN feature with the following
limitation:
– To install any PCI adapter, the power cords must be removed from the power
source before you remove the PCI Express riser assembly and the PCI-X
riser assembly. Otherwise, this will cause the active power management event
signal to become disabled by the system board logic and Wake on LAN might
not work. However, after the server is powered-on locally, the active power
management event signal will be enabled by the system board logic.
v The integrated management module (MM) can turn off the server as an
automatic response to a critical system failure.

Chapter 2. Introduction 15
Internal LEDs, connectors, and jumpers
The illustrations in this section show the connectors, LEDs, and jumpers on the
internal boards. The illustrations might differ slightly from your hardware.

System-board internal connectors

The following illustration shows the internal connectors on the system board.

16 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
System-board external connectors
The following illustration shows the external connectors on the system board:

Chapter 2. Introduction 17
System-board switches and jumpers
The following illustration shows the switches and jumpers on the system board:

Note: If a clear protective sticker is present on top of the SW3 switch block, you
must remove and discard it in order to access the switches.

Table 2. System board jumpers

Jumper number Jumper name Jumper setting
J29 UEFI boot recovery jumper v Pins 1 and 2: Normal
(default) Loads the primary
server (formerly BIOS)
firmware ROM page.
v Pins 2 and 3: Loads the
secondary (backup) server
firmware ROM page.
J147 IMM recovery jumper v Pins 1 and 2: Normal
(default) Loads the primary
IMM firmware ROM page.
v Pins 2 and 3: Loads the
secondary (backup) IMM
firmware ROM page.

18 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Table 2. System board jumpers (continued)
Jumper number Jumper name Jumper setting

Notes:
1. If no jumper is present, the server responds as if the pins are set to 1 and 2.
2. Changing the position of the UEFI boot recovery jumper from pins 1 and 2 to pins 2 and
3 before the server is turned on alters which flash ROM page is loaded. Do not change
the jumper pin position after the server is turned on. This can cause an unpredictable
problem.

The following table describes the functions of the SW3 switch block:
Table 3. SW3 switch definition
Switch
number Default position Description
1 Off Clear CMOS memory. When this
switch is toggled to On, it clears the
data in CMOS memory, which clears
the power-on password.
2 Off Reserved.
3 Off Reserved.
4 Off Reserved.
5 Off Power-on password override.
Changing the position of this switch
bypasses the power-on password
check the next time the server is
turned on and starts the Setup utility
so that you can change or delete the
power-on password. You do not have
to move the switch back to the
default position after the power-on
password in overridden.

Changing the position of this switch

does not affect the administrator
password check if an administrator
password is set.
6 Off When you toggle this switch to On
and then Off, you force a power-on,
which overrides the power-on and
power-off button on the server and
they become nonfunctional.
7 Off Reserved.
8 Off Reserved.

Important:
1. Before you change any switch settings or move any jumpers, turn off the server;
then, disconnect all power cords and external cables. Review the information in
vii, “Installation guidelines” on page 119, “Handling static-sensitive devices” on
page 121, and “Turning off the server” on page 14.
2. Any system-board switch or jumper blocks that are not shown in the illustrations
in this document are reserved.

Chapter 2. Introduction 19
System-board LEDs
The following illustration shows the light-emitting diodes (LEDs) on the system
board:

20 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
System-board optional device connectors
The following illustration shows the connectors for user-installable options:

Chapter 2. Introduction 21
22 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Chapter 3. Diagnostics
This chapter describes the diagnostic tools that are available to help you solve
problems that might occur in the server.

If you cannot locate and correct a problem by using the information in this chapter,
see Appendix A, “Getting help and technical assistance,” on page 211 for more
information.

Diagnostic tools
The following tools are available to help you diagnose and solve hardware-related
problems:
v Troubleshooting tables
These tables list problem symptoms and actions to correct the problems. See
“Troubleshooting tables” on page 39 for more information.
v Light path diagnostics
Use light path diagnostics to diagnose system errors quickly. See “Light path
diagnostics” on page 55 for more information.
v Dynamic System Analysis (DSA) Preboot diagnostic programs
The DSA Preboot diagnostic programs provide problem isolation, configuration
analysis, and error log collection. The diagnostic programs are the primary
method of testing the major components of the server and are stored in
integrated USB memory. The diagnostic programs collect the following
information about the server:
– System configuration
– Network interfaces and settings
– Installed hardware
– Light path diagnostics status
– Service processor status and configuration
– Vital product data, firmware, and UEFI configuration
– Hard disk drive health
– RAID controller configuration
– Controller and service processor event logs, including the following
information:
- System error logs
- Temperature, voltage, and fan speed information
- Self-monitoring Analysis, and Reporting Technology (SMART) data
- Machine check registers
- USB information
- Monitor configuration information
- PCI slot information
The diagnostic programs create a merged log that includes events from all
collected logs. The information is collected into a file that you can send to IBM
service and support. Additionally, you can view the server information locally
through a generated text report file. You can also copy the log to removable
media and view the log from a Web browser. See “Running the diagnostic
programs” on page 67 for more information.
v IBM Electronic Service Agent
IBM Electronic Service Agent is a software tool that monitors the server for
hardware error events and automatically submits electronic service requests to
IBM service and support. In addition, it can collect and transmit system

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009 23

 configuration information on a scheduled basis so that the information is available
to you and your support representative. It uses minimal system resources, and is
available free of charge. For more information and to download IBM Electronic
Service Agent, go to http://www.ibm.com/support/electronic/
v Checkpoint codes
Checkpoint codes track the progress of POST routines at system startup or
reset. Checkpoint codes are shown on the checkpoint code display on the light
path diagnostics panel. See “Checkpoint codes (trained service technician only)”
on page 38 for more information.

POST
When you turn on the server, it performs a series of tests to check the operation of
the server components and some optional devices in the server. This series of tests
is called the power-on self-test, or POST.

Note: This server does not use beep codes for server status.

If a power-on password is set, you must type the password and press Enter, when
you are prompted, for POST to run.

If POST detects a problem an error message is displayed. See “POST error codes”
on page 27 for more information.

24 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Error logs
Error codes and messages are displayed in the following types of event logs. Some
of the error codes and messages in the logs are abbreviated. When you are
troubleshooting PCI-X slots, note that the event logs report the PCI-X buses
numerically. The numerical assignments vary depending on the configuration. You
can check the assignments by running the Setup utility (see “Using the Setup utility”
on page 191 for more information).
v POST event log: This log contains the three most recent error codes and
messages that were generated during POST. You can view the contents of the
POST event log from the Setup utility (see “Starting the Setup utility” on page
191).
v System-event log: This log contains messages that were generated during
POST and all system status messages from the service processor. You can view
the contents of the system-event log from the Setup utility.
The system-event log is limited in size. When it is full, new entries will not
overwrite existing entries; therefore, you must periodically clear the system-event
log through the Setup utility. When you are troubleshooting an error, be sure to
clear the system-event log so that you can find current errors more easily.
Each system-event log entry is displayed on its own page. Messages are listed
on the left side of the screen, and details about the selected message are
displayed on the right side of the screen. To move from one entry to the next,
use the Up Arrow (↑) and Down Arrow (↓) keys.
The system-event log indicates an assertion event when an event has occurred.
It indicates a deassertion event when the event is no longer occurring.
v Event log: This log contains a superset of information that is in the system-event
log. You can only access the event log through the IMM Web interface. For more
information, see “Logging on to the Web interface” on page 201.
v Diagnostic event log: This log is generated by the Dynamic System Analysis
(DSA) program, and it contains merged contents of the system-event log and the
IMM system event log. You can view the diagnostic event log from the DSA
program (see “Viewing event logs without restarting the server”).

Viewing event logs from the Setup utility

To view the error logs, complete the following steps:
1. Turn on the server.
2. When the prompt <F1> Setup is displayed, press F1. If you have set both a
power-on password and an administrator password, you must type the
administrator password to view the error logs.
3. Select System Event Logs and use one of the following procedures:
v To view the POST error log, select POST Event Viewers.
v To view the IMM system-event log, select System Event Log.

Viewing event logs without restarting the server

When the server is not hung and the IMM is connected to a network, methods are
available for you to view one or more event logs without having to restart the
server.

If you have installed Portable Dynamic System Analysis (DSA), you can use it to
view the diagnostic event log, which merges the contents of the system-event log
and the IMM system event log. You can also use DSA Preboot to view the
diagnostic event log, although you must restart the server to use DSA Preboot. To
install Portable DSA or DSA Preboot or download a DSA Preboot CD image, go to

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 25
 http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/supportsite.wss/docdisplay?lndocid=SERV-DSA
&brandind=5000008 or complete the following steps.

Note: Changes are made periodically to the IBM Web site. The actual procedure
might vary slightly from what is described in this document.
1. Go to http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/.
2. Under Product support, click System x.
3. Under Popular links, click Software and device drivers.
4. Under Related downloads, click Dynamic System Analysis (DSA) to display
the matrix of downloadable DSA files.

If IPMItool is installed in the server, you can use it to view the system-event log.
Most recent versions of the Linux operating system come with a current version of
IPMItool. For information about IPMItool, see http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/
infocenter/toolsctr/v1r0/index.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.xseries.tools.doc/
config_tools_ipmitool.html or complete the following steps.

Note: Changes are made periodically to the IBM Web site. The actual procedure
might vary slightly from what is described in this document.
1. Go to http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/toolsctr/v1r0/index.jsp.
2. In the navigation pane, click IBM System x and BladeCenter Tools Center.
3. Expand Tools reference, expand Configuration tools, expand IPMI tools, and
click IPMItool.

For an overview of IPMI, go to http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/systems/

index.jsp?topic=/liaai/ipmi/liaaiipmi.htm or complete the following steps:
1. Go to http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/systems/index.jsp.
2. In the navigation pane, click IBM Systems Information Center.
3. Expand Operating systems, expand Linux information, expand Blueprints
for Linux on IBM systems, and click Using Intelligent Platform Management
Interface (IPMI) on IBM Linux platforms.

You can view the IMM system event log through the Event Log link in the
integrated management module (IMM) Web interface. For more information, see
“Logging on to the Web interface” on page 201.

The following table describes the methods that you can use to view the event logs,
depending on the condition of the server. The first three conditions generally do not
require that you restart the server.
Table 4. Methods for viewing event logs
Condition Action
The server is not hung and is connected to a Run Portable DSA to view the diagnostic
network. event log or create an output file that you
can send to IBM service and support.

Alternatively, you can use IPMItool to view

the system-event log.
The server is not hung and is not connected Use IPMItool locally to view the system-event
to a network. log.

26 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
 Table 4. Methods for viewing event logs (continued)
Condition Action
The server is not hung and the integrated In a Web browser, type the IP address for
management module (IMM) is connected to the IMM and go to the Event Log page. For
a network. more information, see “Obtaining the IP
address for the IMM” on page 200 and
“Logging on to the Web interface” on page
201.
The server is hung. Restart the server and press F2 to start DSA
Preboot and view the diagnostic event log
(see “Running the diagnostic programs” on
page 67 for more information).

Alternatively, you can restart the server and

press F1 to start the Setup utility and view
the POST event log or system-event log. For
more information, see “Viewing event logs
from the Setup utility” on page 25.

Clearing the error logs

To clear the error logs, complete the following steps.

Note: The POST error log is automatically cleared each time the server is
restarted.
1. Turn on the server.
2. When the prompt <F1> Setup is displayed, press F1. If you have set both a
power-on password and an administrator password, you must type the
administrator password to view the error logs.
3. Use one of the following procedures:
v To clear the IMM system-event log, select System Event Logs --> System
Event Log. Select Clear System Event Log; then, press Enter twice.

POST error codes

The following table describes the POST error codes and suggested actions to
correct the detected problems. These errors can appear as severe, warning, or
informational.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 27
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3550 M2 Type 7946,” on page 111 to determine which components
are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical
information, hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Error code Description Action
0010002 Microprocessor not supported. 1. Reseat the following components one at a time, in
the order shown, restarting the server each time.
a. (Trained service technician only)
Microprocessor 1.
b. (Trained service technician only)
Microprocessor 2 (if installed.)
2. (Trained service technician only) Remove
microprocessor 2 and restart the server.
3. (Trained service technician only) Remove
microprocessor 1 and install microprocessor 2 in
the microprocessor 1 connector. Restart the
server. If the error is corrected, then
microprocessor 1 is bad and must be replaced.
4. Replace the following components one at a time,
in the order shown, restarting the server each
time.
a. (Trained service technician only)
Microprocessor 1.
b. (Trained service technician only)
Microprocessor 2.
c. (Trained service technician only) System
board.
0011000 Invalid microprocessor type. 1. Update the server firmware to the latest level (see
“Updating the firmware” on page 187).
2. (Trained service technician only) Remove and
replace the affected microprocessor (error LED is
lit) with a supported type (see “Installing a
microprocessor and heat sink” on page 178).
0011002 Microprocessor mismatch. 1. Run the Setup utility and select System
Information → System Summary → Processor
Details to view the microprocessor information to
compare the installed microprocessor
specifications.
2. (Trained service technician only) Remove and
replace one of the microprocessors so that they
both match.

28 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3550 M2 Type 7946,” on page 111 to determine which components
are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical
information, hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Error code Description Action
0011004 Microprocessor failed BIST. 1. Update the server firmware to the latest level (see
“Updating the firmware” on page 187).
2. (Trained service technician only) Reseat
microprocessor 2.
3. Replace the following components one at a time,
in the order shown, restarting the server each
time:
a. (Trained service technician only)
Microprocessor
b. (Trained service technician only) System
board
001100A Microcode updated failed. 1. Update the server firmware to the latest level (see
“Updating the firmware” on page 187).
2. (Trained service technician only) Replace the
microprocessor.
0050001 DIMM disabled. 1. If the server fails the POST memory test, reseat
the DIMMs.
2. Remove and replace any DIMM for which the
associated error LED is lit (see “Removing a
memory module” on page 139 and “Installing a
memory module” on page 139).
3. Run the Setup utility to enable all the DIMMs.
4. Run the DSA Preboot memory test (see “Running
the diagnostic programs” on page 67).
0051003 Uncorrectable DIMM error 1. If the server failed the POST memory test, reseat
the DIMMs.
2. Remove and replace any DIMM for which the
associated error LED is lit (see “Removing a
memory module” on page 139 and “Installing a
memory module” on page 139).
3. Run the Setup utility to enable all the DIMMs.
4. Run the DSA Preboot memory test (see“Running
the diagnostic programs” on page 67).
0051006 DIMM mismatch detected Make sure that the DIMMs match and are installed in
the correct sequence (see “Installing a memory
module” on page 139).
0051009 No memory detected. 1. Make sure that the server contains DIMMs.
2. Reseat the DIMMs.
3. Install DIMMs in the correct sequence (see
“Installing a memory module” on page 139).

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 29
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3550 M2 Type 7946,” on page 111 to determine which components
are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical
information, hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Error code Description Action
005100A No usable memory detected. 1. Make sure that the server contains DIMMs.
2. Reseat the DIMMs.
3. Install DIMMs in the correct sequence (see
“Installing a memory module” on page 139).
4. Clear CMOS memory to re-enable all the memory
connectors (see Table 2 on page 18).
0058001 PFA threshold exceeded 1. Update the server firmware to the latest level (see
“Updating the firmware” on page 187).
2. Reseat the DIMMs and run the memory test (see
“Running the diagnostic programs” on page 67).
3. Replace the failing DIMM, which is indicated by a
lit LED on the system board.
0058007 DIMM population is unsupported. 1. Reseat the DIMMs, and then restart the server.
2. Remove the lowest-numbered DIMM pair of those
that are identified and replace it with an identical
pair of known good DIMMs, then restart the
server.
3. Return the removed DIMMs, one pair at a time, to
their original connectors, restarting the server after
each pair, until a pair fails. Replace the DIMMs in
the failed pair with identical known good DIMMs,
restarting the server after each DIMM is installed.
Replace the failed DIMM. Repeat this step until
you have tested all removed DIMMs.
4. (Trained service technician only) Replace the
system board.
0058008 DIMM failed memory test. 1. Reseat the DIMMs, and then restart the server.
2. Replace the following components one at a time,
in the order shown, then restart the server after
each:
a. DIMM
b. (Trained service technician only) System
board
00580A1 Invalid DIMM population for mirroring mode 1. If a fault LED is lit, resolve the failure.
2. Install the DIMMs in the correct sequence (see
“Installing a memory module” on page 139).
00580A4 Memory population changed. Information only. Memory has been added, moved, or
changed.
00580A5 Mirror failover complete Information only. Memory redundancy has been lost.
Check the event log for uncorrected DIMM failure
events.

30 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3550 M2 Type 7946,” on page 111 to determine which components
are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical
information, hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Error code Description Action
0068002 CMOS battery cleared. 1. Reseat the battery.
2. Clear the CMOS memory (see Table 3 on page
19).
3. Replace the following components one at a time,
in the following order, restarting the server after
each one:
a. Battery
b. (Trained service technician only) System
board.
2011001 PCI-X PERR 1. Check the riser-card LEDs.
2. Reseat all affected adapters and riser cards.
3. Update the PCI adapter firmware.
4. Remove the adapter from the riser card.
5. Replace the following components one at a time,
in the order shown, restarting the server each
time:
a. Riser card
b. (Trained service technician only) System
board
2018001 PCI Express uncorrected or uncorrected error 1. Check the riser-card LEDs.
2. Reseat all affected adapters and riser cards.
3. Update the PCI adapter firmware.
4. Remove the adapter from the riser card.
5. Replace the following components one at a time,
in the order shown, restarting the server each
time:
a. Riser card
b. (Trained service technician only) System
board

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 31
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3550 M2 Type 7946,” on page 111 to determine which components
are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical
information, hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Error code Description Action
2018002 Option ROM resource allocation failure Informational message that some devices might not
be initialized.
1. If possible, rearrange the order of the adapters in
the PCI slots to change the load order of the
optional-device ROM code.
2. Run the Setup utility, select Startup Options, and
change the boot priority to change the load order
of the optional-device ROM code.
3. Run the Setup utility and disable some other
resources, if their functions are not being used, to
make more space available.
a. Select Startup Options, then Planar
Ethernet (PXE/DHCP) to disable the
integrated Ethernet controller ROM.
b. Select Advanced Functions, then PCI Bus
Control, then PCI ROM Control Execution to
disable the ROM of the adapter in the PCI
slots.
c. Select Devices and I/O Ports to disable any
of the integrated devices.
4. Replace the following components one at a time,
in the order shown, restarting the server each
time:
a. Each adapter
b. (Trained service technician only) System
board
3xx0007 (xx Firmware fault detected, system halted 1. Recover the server firmware to the latest level.
can be 00 -
2. Undo any recent configuration changes, or clear
19)
CMOS memory to restore the settings to the
default values (see Table 3 on page 19.
3. Remove any recently installed hardware.
3038003 Firmware corrupted 1. Run the Setup utility, select Load Default
Settings, and save the settings to recover the
server firmware.
2. (Trained service technician only) Replace the
system board.
3048005 Booted secondary (backup) UEFI Image Information only. The backup switch was used to boot
the secondary bank.

32 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3550 M2 Type 7946,” on page 111 to determine which components
are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical
information, hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Error code Description Action
3048006 Booted secondary (backup) UEFI image 1. Run the Setup utility, select Load Default
because of ABR Settings, and save the settings to recover the
primary UEFI settings.
2. Turn off the server and remove it from the power
source.
3. Reconnect the server to the power source, then
turn on the server.
3058000A RTC date/time is incorrect 1. Adjust the date and time settings in the Setup
utility, and then restart the server.
2. Reseat the battery.
3. Replace the following components one at a time,
in the order shown, restarting the server each
time:
a. Battery
b. (Trained service technician only) System
board
3058001 System configuration invalid 1. Run the Setup utility, and select Save Settings.
2. Run the Setup utility, select Load Default
Settings, and save the settings.
3. Reseat the following components one at a time in
the order shown, restarting the server each time:
a. Battery
b. Failing device (if the device is a FRU, then it
must be reseated by a trained service
technician only)
4. Replace the following components one at a time,
in the order shown, restarting the server each
time:
a. Battery
b. Failing device (if the device is a FRU, then it
must be replaced by a trained service
technician only)
c. (Trained service technician only) System board

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 33
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3550 M2 Type 7946,” on page 111 to determine which components
are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical
information, hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Error code Description Action
3058004 Three boot failure 1. Undo any recent system changes, such as new
settings or newly installed devices.
2. Make sure that the server is attached to a reliable
power source.
3. Remove all hardware that is not listed on the
ServerProven Web site at http://www.ibm.com/
servers/eserver/serverproven/compat/us/.
4. Make sure that the operating system is not
corrupted.
5. Run the Setup utility, save the configuration, and
then restart the server.
6. See “Problem determination tips” on page 109.
3108007 System configuration restored to default Information only. This is message is usually
settings associated with the CMOS battery clear event.
3138002 Boot configuration error 1. Remove any recent configuration changes made
to the Setup utility.
2. Run the Setup utility, select Load Default
Settings, and save the settings.
3808000 IMM communication failure 1. Remove power from the server for 30 seconds,
and then reconnect the server to power and
restart it.
2. Update the IMM firmware to the latest level (see
“Updating the firmware” on page 187).
3. Make sure that the virtual media key is seated
and not damaged.
4. (Trained service technician only) Replace the
system board.
3808002 Error updating system configuration to IMM 1. Remove power from the server, and then
reconnect the server to power and restart it.
2. Run the Setup utility and select Save Settings.
3. Update the IMM firmware to the latest level (see
“Updating the firmware” on page 187).
3808003 Error retrieving system configuration from 1. Remove power from the server, and then
IMM reconnect the server to power and restart it.
2. Run the Setup utility and select Save Settings.
3. Update the IMM firmware to the latest level (see
“Updating the firmware” on page 187).

34 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3550 M2 Type 7946,” on page 111 to determine which components
are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical
information, hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Error code Description Action
3808004 IMM system event log full v When using out-of-band, use the IMM Web
interface or IPMItool to clear the logs from the
operating system.
v When using the local console:
1. Run the Setup utility.
2. Select System Event Log.
3. Select Clear System Event Log.
4. Restart the server.
3818001 Core Root of Trust Measurement (CRTM) 1. Run the Setup utility, select Load Default
update failed Settings, and save the settings.
2. (Trained service technician only) Replace the
system board.
3818002 Core Root of Trust Measurement (CRTM) 1. Run the Setup utility, select Load Default
update aborted Settings, and save the settings.
2. (Trained service technician only) Replace the
system board.
3818003 Core Root of Trust Measurement (CRTM) 1. Run the Setup utility, select Load Default
flash lock failed Settings, and save the settings.
2. (Trained service technician only) Replace the
system board.
3818004 Core Root of Trust Measurement (CRTM) 1. Run the Setup utility, select Load Default
system error Settings, and save the settings.
2. (Trained service technician only) Replace the
system board.
3818005 Current Bank Core Root of Trust 1. Run the Setup utility, select Load Default
Measurement (CRTM) capsule signature Settings, and save the settings.
invalid
2. (Trained service technician only) Replace the
system board.
3818006 Opposite bank CRTM capsule signature 1. Switch the server firmware bank to the backup
invalid bank (see “Starting the backup server firmware”
on page 197).
2. Run the Setup utility, select Load Default
Settings, and save the settings.
3. Switch the bank back to the primary bank.
4. (Trained service technician only) Replace the
system board.
3818007 CRTM update capsule signature invalid 1. Run the Setup utility, select Load Default
Settings, and save the settings.
2. (Trained service technician only) Replace the
system board.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 35
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3550 M2 Type 7946,” on page 111 to determine which components
are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical
information, hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Error code Description Action
3828004 AEM power capping disabled 1. Check the settings and the event logs.
2. Make sure that the Active Energy Manager feature
is enabled in the Setup utility. Select System
Settings, Power, Active Energy, and Capping
Enabled.
3. Update the server firmware to the latest level (see
“Updating the firmware” on page 187).
4. Update the IMM firmware to the latest level (see
“Updating the firmware” on page 187).

36 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Checkout procedure
The checkout procedure is the sequence of tasks that you should follow to
diagnose a problem in the server.

About the checkout procedure

Before you perform the checkout procedure for diagnosing hardware problems,
review the following information:
v Read the safety information that begins on page vii.
v The diagnostic programs provide the primary methods of testing the major
components of the server, such as the system board, Ethernet controller,
keyboard, mouse (pointing device), serial ports, and hard disk drives. You can
also use them to test some external devices. If you are not sure whether a
problem is caused by the hardware or by the software, you can use the
diagnostic programs to confirm that the hardware is working correctly.
v When you run the diagnostic programs, a single problem might cause more than
one error message. When this happens, correct the cause of the first error
message. The other error messages usually will not occur the next time you run
the diagnostic programs.

Exception: If multiple error codes or light path diagnostics LEDs indicate a

microprocessor error, the error might be in the microprocessor or in the
microprocessor socket. See “Microprocessor problems” on page 47 for
information about diagnosing microprocessor problems.
v Before you run the diagnostic programs, you must determine whether the failing
server is part of a shared hard disk drive cluster (two or more servers sharing
external storage devices). If it is part of a cluster, you can run all diagnostic
programs except the ones that test the storage unit (that is, a hard disk drive in
the storage unit) or the storage adapter that is attached to the storage unit. The
failing server might be part of a cluster if any of the following conditions is true:
– You have identified the failing server as part of a cluster (two or more servers
sharing external storage devices).
– One or more external storage units are attached to the failing server and at
least one of the attached storage units is also attached to another server or
unidentifiable device.
– One or more servers are located near the failing server.

Important: If the server is part of a shared hard disk drive cluster, run one test
at a time. Do not run any suite of tests, such as “quick” or “normal” tests,
because this might enable the hard disk drive diagnostic tests.
v If the server is halted and a POST error code is displayed, see “Error logs” on
page 25. If the server is halted and no error message is displayed, see
“Troubleshooting tables” on page 39 and “Solving undetermined problems” on
page 108.
v For information about power-supply problems, see “Solving power problems” on
page 107.
v For intermittent problems, check the error log; see “Error logs” on page 25 and
“Diagnostic programs and messages” on page 66.

Performing the checkout procedure

To perform the checkout procedure, complete the following steps:
1. Is the server part of a cluster?

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 37
 v No: Go to step 2.
v Yes: Shut down all failing servers that are related to the cluster. Go to step 2.
2. Complete the following steps:
a. Check the power supply LEDs (see “Power-supply LEDs” on page 64).
b. Turn off the server and all external devices.
c. Check all internal and external devices for compatibility at
http://www.ibm.com/servers/eserver/serverproven/compat/us/.
d. Check all cables and power cords.
e. Set all display controls to the middle positions.
f. Turn on all external devices.
g. Turn on the server. If the server does not start, see “Troubleshooting tables”
on page 39.
h. Check the system-error LED on the operator information panel. If it is
flashing, check the light path diagnostics LEDs (see “Light path diagnostics”
on page 55).

Note: When you slide the light path diagnostics panel out of the server to
check the LEDs or checkpoint codes, do not run the server continuously
with light path diagnostics panel outside of the server. The panel should only
be outside of the server a short time. The light path diagnostics panel must
remain in the server when the server is running to ensure proper cooling.
i. Check for the following results:
v Successful completion of POST (see “POST” on page 24 for more
information)
v Successful completion of startup

Checkpoint codes (trained service technician only)

A checkpoint code is either a byte or a word value produced by the UEFI and sent
to the I/O port that indicate the point at which the system stopped during the boot
block and power-on self test (POST); it does not provide error codes or suggest
replacement components to be replaced. These codes can be used by IBM service
and support for more in-depth troubleshooting. Checkpoint codes are shown on the
display area on the light path diagnostics panel (see “Light path diagnostics” on
page 55 for the location of the display area). By using the checkpoint code display,
you do not have to wait for the video to initialize each time you restart the server.

There are two types of checkpoint codes: field programmable gate array (FPGA)
hardware checkpoint codes and UEFI checkpoint codes. The UEFI checkpoint
codes might change because of code sequence and timing changes or when the
server firmware is updated. See http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?lndocid=MIGR-5079109&brandind=5000008 for
checkpoint code information.

38 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Troubleshooting tables
Use the troubleshooting tables to find solutions to problems that have identifiable
symptoms.

If you cannot find a problem in these tables, see “Running the diagnostic programs”
on page 67 for information about testing the server.

If you have just added new software or a new optional device and the server is not
working, complete the following steps before you use the troubleshooting tables:
1. Check the system-error LED on the operator information panel; if it is lit, check
the light path diagnostics LEDs (see “Light path diagnostics” on page 55).
2. Remove the software or device that you just added.
3. Run the diagnostic tests to determine whether the server is running correctly.
4. Reinstall the new software or new device.

CD/DVD drive problems

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3550 M2 Type 7946,” on page 111 to determine which components
are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
Trained service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical
information, hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Symptom Action
The CD-ROM/DVD-ROM drive 1. Make sure that:
is not recognized.
v The SATA connector to which the CD or DVD drive is attached (primary or
secondary) is enabled in the Setup utility.
v All cables and jumpers are installed correctly.
v The correct device driver is installed for the CD or DVD drive.
2. Run the CD or DVD drive diagnostic programs.
3. Reseat the following components:
a. CD or DVD drive
b. CD or DVD drive cable
4. Replace the components listed in step 3 one at a time, in the order shown,
restarting the server each time.
5. (Trained service technician only) Replace the system board.
A CD or DVD is not working 1. Clean the CD or DVD.
correctly.
2. Replace the CD or DVD with new CD or DVD media.
3. Run the CD or DVD drive diagnostic programs.
4. Reseat the CD or DVD drive.
5. Replace the CD or DVD drive.
The CD or DVD drive tray is not 1. Make sure that the server is turned on.
working.
2. Insert the end of a straightened paper clip into the manual tray-release
opening.
3. Reseat the CD or DVD drive.
4. Replace the CD or DVD drive.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 39
General problems
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3550 M2 Type 7946,” on page 111 to determine which components
are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
Trained service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical
information, hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Symptom Action
A cover latch is broken, an LED If the part is a CRU, replace it. If the part is a FRU, the part must be replaced by a
is not working, or a similar trained service technician.
problem has occurred.

Hard disk drive problems

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3550 M2 Type 7946,” on page 111 to determine which components
are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
Trained service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical
information, hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Symptom Action
A hard disk drive has failed, and Replace the failed hard disk drive (see “Removing a hot-swap hard disk drive” on
the associated amber hard disk page 131 and “Installing a hot-swap hard disk drive” on page 132.
drive status LED is lit.

40 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3550 M2 Type 7946,” on page 111 to determine which components
are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
Trained service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical
information, hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Symptom Action
A newly installed hard disk drive 1. Observe the associated amber hard disk drive status LED. If the LED is lit, it
is not recognized. indicates a drive fault.
2. If the LED is lit, remove the drive from the bay, wait 45 seconds, and reinsert
the drive, making sure that the drive assembly connects to the hard disk drive
backplane.
3. Observe the associated green hard disk drive activity LED and the amber
status LED:
v If the green activity LED is flashing and the amber status LED is not lit, the
drive is recognized by the controller and is working correctly. Run the DSA
hard disk drive test to determine whether the drive is detected.
v If the green activity LED is flashing and the amber status LED is flashing
slowly, the drive is recognized by the controller and is rebuilding.
v If neither LED is lit or flashing, check the hard disk drive backplane (go to
step 4).
v If the green activity LED is flashing and the amber status LED is lit, replace
the drive. If the activity of the LEDs remains the same, go to step 4. If the
activity of the LEDs changes, return to step 1.
4. Make sure that the hard disk drive backplane is correctly seated. When it is
correctly seated, the drive assemblies correctly connect to the backplane
without bowing or causing movement of the backplane.
5. Reseat the backplane power cable and repeat steps 1 through 3.
6. Reseat the backplane signal cable and repeat steps 1 through 3.
7. Suspect the backplane signal cable or the backplane:
v If the server has eight hot-swap bays:
a. Replace the affected backplane signal cable.
b. Replace the affected backplane.
8. Run the DSA tests for the SAS/SATA adapter and hard disk drives (see
“Running the diagnostic programs” on page 67).
v If the adapter passes the test but the drives are not recognized, replace the
backplane signal cable and run the tests again.
v Replace the backplane.
v If the adapter fails the test, disconnect the backplane signal cable from the
adapter and run the tests again.
v If the adapter fails the test, replace the adapter.
9. See “Problem determination tips” on page 109.
Multiple hard disk drives fail. Make sure that the hard disk drive, SAS/SATA RAID adapter, and server device
drivers and firmware are at the latest level.
Important: Some cluster solutions require specific code levels or coordinated
code updates. If the device is part of a cluster solution, verify that the latest level of
code is supported for the cluster solution before you update the code.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 41
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3550 M2 Type 7946,” on page 111 to determine which components
are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
Trained service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical
information, hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Symptom Action
Multiple hard disk drives are 1. Review the storage subsystem logs for indications of problems within the
offline. storage subsystem, such as backplane or cable problems.
2. See “Problem determination tips” on page 109.
A replacement hard disk drive 1. Make sure that the hard disk drive is recognized by the adapter (the green hard
does not rebuild. disk drive activity LED is flashing).
2. Review the SAS/SATA RAID adapter documentation to determine the correct
configuration parameters and settings.
A green hard disk drive activity 1. If the green hard disk drive activity LED does not flash when the drive is in use,
LED does not accurately run the DSA disk drive test (see “Running the diagnostic programs” on page
represent the actual state of the 67.
associated drive.
2. Use one of the following procedures:
v If the drive passes the test, replace the backplane.
v If the drive fails the test, replace the drive.
An amber hard disk drive status 1. If the amber hard disk drive LED and the RAID adapter software do not
LED does not accurately indicate the same status for the drive, complete the following steps:
represent the actual state of the
a. Turn off the server.
associated drive.
b. Reseat the SAS/SATA adapter.
c. Reseat the backplane signal cable and backplane power cable.
d. Reseat the hard disk drive.
e. Turn on the server and observe the activity of the hard disk drive LEDs.
2. See “Problem determination tips” on page 109.

42 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Hypervisor problems
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3550 M2 Type 7946,” on page 111 to determine which components
are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
Trained service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical
information, hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Symptom Action
If an optional embedded 1. Make sure that the optional embedded hypervisor flash device is selected on
hypervisor flash device is not the boot manager <F12> Select Boot Device) at startup.
listed in the expected boot
2. Make sure that the embedded hypervisor flash device is seated in the
order, does not appear in the
connector correctly (see “Removing a USB embedded hypervisor flash device”
list of boot devices, or a similar
on page 150 and “Installing a USB embedded hypervisor flash device” on page
problem has occurred.
151).
3. See the documentation that comes with the optional embedded hypervisor flash
device for setup and configuration information.
4. Make sure that other software works on the server.

Intermittent problems
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3550 M2 Type 7946,” on page 111 to determine which components
are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
Trained service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical
information, hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Symptom Action
A problem occurs only 1. Make sure that:
occasionally and is difficult to v All cables and cords are connected securely to the rear of the server and
diagnose. attached devices.
v When the server is turned on, air is flowing from the fan grille. If there is no
airflow, the fan is not working. This can cause the server to overheat and
shut down.
2. Check the system-error log or IMM system event log (see “Error logs” on page
25).

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 43
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3550 M2 Type 7946,” on page 111 to determine which components
are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
Trained service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical
information, hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Symptom Action
The server resets (restarts) 1. If the reset occurs during POST and the POST watchdog timer is enabled (click
occasionally. System Settings --> Integrated Management Module --> POST Watchdog
Timer in the Setup utility to see the POST watchdog setting), make sure that
sufficient time is allowed in the watchdog timeout value (POST Watchdog
Timer). If the server continues to reset during POST, see “POST” on page 24
and “Diagnostic programs and messages” on page 66.
2. If the reset occurs after the operating system starts, disable any automatic
server restart (ASR) utilities, such as the IBM Automatic Server Restart IPMI
Application for Windows, or any ASR devices that are be installed.
Note: ASR utilities operate as operating-system utilities and are related to the
IPMI device driver. If the reset continues to occur after the operating system
starts, the operating system might have a problem; see “Software problems” on
page 54.
3. If neither condition applies, check the system-error log or IMM system-event log
(see “Error logs” on page 25).

Keyboard, mouse, or pointing-device problems

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3550 M2 Type 7946,” on page 111 to determine which components
are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
Trained service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical
information, hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Symptom Action
All or some keys on the 1. Make sure that:
keyboard do not work. v The keyboard cable is securely connected.
v If you are using a PS/2 keyboard, the keyboard and mouse cables are not
reversed.
v The server and the monitor are turned on.
2. If you are using a USB keyboard, run the Setup utility and enable keyboardless
operation to prevent the 301 POST error message from being displayed during
startup.
3. If you are using a USB keyboard and it is connected to a USB hub, disconnect
the keyboard from the hub and connect it directly to the server.
4. Replace the following components one at a time, in the order shown, restarting
the server each time:
a. Keyboard
b. (Trained service technician only) System board

44 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3550 M2 Type 7946,” on page 111 to determine which components
are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
Trained service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical
information, hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Symptom Action
The mouse or pointing device 1. Make sure that:
does not work.
v The mouse or pointing-device cable is securely connected to the server.
v If you are using a pointing device, the keyboard and mouse or
pointing-device cables are not reversed.
v The mouse or pointing-device device drivers are installed correctly.
v The server and the monitor are turned on.
v The mouse option is enabled in the Setup utility.
2. If you are using a USB mouse or pointing device and it is connected to a USB
hub, disconnect the mouse or pointing device from the hub and connect it
directly to the server.
3. Replace the following components one at a time, in the order shown, restarting
the server each time:
a. Mouse or pointing device
b. (Trained service technician only) System board

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 45
Memory problems
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3550 M2 Type 7946,” on page 111 to determine which components
are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
Trained service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical
information, hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Symptom Action
The amount of system memory 1. Make sure that:
that is displayed is less than the
v No error LEDs are lit on the operator information panel.
amount of installed physical
memory. v Memory mirroring does not account for the discrepancy.
v The memory modules are seated correctly.
v You have installed the correct type of memory.
v If you changed the memory, you updated the memory configuration in the
Setup utility.
v All banks of memory are enabled. The server might have automatically
disabled a memory bank when it detected a problem, or a memory bank
might have been manually disabled.
2. Check the POST error log:
v If a DIMM was disabled by a systems-management interrupt (SMI), replace
the DIMM.
v If a DIMM was disabled by the user or by POST, run the Setup utility and
enable the DIMM.
3. Run memory diagnostics (see “Running the diagnostic programs” on page 67).
4. Make sure that there is no memory mismatch when the server is at the
minimum memory configuration (one 1 GB DIMM in slot 3).
5. Add one pair of DIMMs at a time, making sure that the DIMMs in each pair
match.
6. Reseat the DIMM.
7. Restart the server.
Multiple rows of DIMMs in a 1. Reseat the DIMMs; then, restart the server.
branch are identified as failing.
2. Remove the lowest-numbered DIMM pair of those that are identified and
replace it with an identical pair of known good DIMMs; then, restart the server.
Repeat as necessary. If the failures continue after all identified pairs are
replaced, go to step 4.
3. Return the removed DIMMs, one pair at a time, to their original connectors,
restarting the server after each pair, until a pair fails. Replace each DIMM in the
failed pair with an identical known good DIMM, restarting the server after each
DIMM. Replace the failed DIMM. Repeat step 3 until you have tested all
removed DIMMs.
4. Replace the lowest-numbered DIMM pair of those identified; then, restart the
server. Repeat as necessary.
5. (Trained service technician only) Replace the system board.

46 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Microprocessor problems
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3550 M2 Type 7946,” on page 111 to determine which components
are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
Trained service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical
information, hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Symptom Action
The server goes directly to the 1. Correct any errors that are indicated by the light path diagnostics LEDs (see
POST Event Viewer when it is “Light path diagnostics” on page 55).
turned on.
2. Make sure that the server supports all the microprocessors and that the
microprocessors match in speed and cache size. To view the microprocessor
information, run the Setup utility and select System Information → System
Summary → Processor Details.
3. (Trained service technician only) Make sure that microprocessor 1 is seated
correctly.
4. (Trained service technician only) Remove microprocessor 2 and restart the
server.
5. Replace the following components one at a time, in the order shown, restarting
the server each time:
a. (Trained service technician only) Microprocessor
b. (Trained service technician only) System board

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 47
Monitor and video problems
Some IBM monitors have their own self-tests. If you suspect a problem with your
monitor, see the documentation that comes with the monitor for instructions for
testing and adjusting the monitor. If you cannot diagnose the problem, call for
service.

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3550 M2 Type 7946,” on page 111 to determine which components
are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
Trained service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical
information, hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Symptom Action
Testing the monitor. 1. Make sure that the monitor cables are firmly connected.
2. Try using a different monitor on the server, or try using the monitor that is being
tested on a different server.
3. Run the diagnostic programs. If the monitor passes the diagnostic programs,
the problem might be a video device driver.
4. (Trained service technician only) Replace the system board.
The screen is blank. 1. If the server is attached to a KVM switch, bypass the KVM switch to eliminate it
as a possible cause of the problem: connect the monitor cable directly to the
correct connector on the rear of the server.
2. Make sure that:
v The server is turned on. If there is no power to the server, see “Power
problems” on page 51.
v The monitor cables are connected correctly.
v The monitor is turned on and the brightness and contrast controls are
adjusted correctly.
3. Make sure that the correct server is controlling the monitor, if applicable.
4. Make sure that damaged server firmware is not affecting the video; see
“Updating the firmware” on page 187.
5. Observe the checkpoint LEDs on the system board; if the codes are changing,
go to step 6.
6. Replace the following components one at a time, in the order shown, restarting
the server each time:
a. Monitor
b. Video adapter (if one is installed)
c. (Trained service technician only) System board.
7. See “Solving undetermined problems” on page 108.
The monitor works when you 1. Make sure that:
turn on the server, but the
v The application program is not setting a display mode that is higher than the
screen goes blank when you
capability of the monitor.
start some application
programs. v You installed the necessary device drivers for the application.
2. Run video diagnostics (see “Running the diagnostic programs” on page 67).
v If the server passes the video diagnostics, the video is good; see “Solving
undetermined problems” on page 108.
v (Trained service technician only) If the server fails the video diagnostics,
replace the system board.

48 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3550 M2 Type 7946,” on page 111 to determine which components
are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
Trained service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical
information, hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Symptom Action
The monitor has screen jitter, or 1. If the monitor self-tests show that the monitor is working correctly, consider the
the screen image is wavy, location of the monitor. Magnetic fields around other devices (such as
unreadable, rolling, or distorted. transformers, appliances, fluorescents, and other monitors) can cause screen
jitter or wavy, unreadable, rolling, or distorted screen images. If this happens,
turn off the monitor.
Attention: Moving a color monitor while it is turned on might cause screen
discoloration.
Move the device and the monitor at least 305 mm (12 in.) apart, and turn on
the monitor.
Notes:
a. To prevent diskette drive read/write errors, make sure that the distance
between the monitor and any external diskette drive is at least 76 mm (3
in.).
b. Non-IBM monitor cables might cause unpredictable problems.
2. Reseat the monitor cable.
3. Replace the components listed in step 2 one at a time, in the order shown,
restarting the server each time:
a. Monitor cable
b. Video adapter (if one is installed)
c. Monitor
d. (Trained service technician only) System board.
Wrong characters appear on the 1. If the wrong language is displayed, update the server firmware to the latest
screen. level (see “Updating the firmware” on page 187) with the correct language.
2. Reseat the monitor cable.
3. Replace the components listed in step 2 one at a time, in the order shown,
restarting the server each time:
a. Monitor cable
b. Video adapter (if one is installed)
c. Monitor
d. (Trained service technician only) System board.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 49
Optional-device problems
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3550 M2 Type 7946,” on page 111 to determine which components
are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
Trained service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical
information, hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Symptom Action
An IBM optional device that was 1. Make sure that:
just installed does not work. v The device is designed for the server (see http://www.ibm.com/servers/
eserver/serverproven/compat/us/).
v You followed the installation instructions that came with the device and the
device is installed correctly.
v You have not loosened any other installed devices or cables.
v You updated the configuration information in the Setup utility. Whenever
memory or any other device is changed, you must update the configuration.
2. Reseat the device that you just installed.
3. Replace the device that you just installed.
An IBM optional device that 1. Make sure that all of the cable connections for the device are secure.
worked previously does not
2. If the device comes with test instructions, use those instructions to test the
work now.
device.
3. If the failing device is a SCSI device, make sure that:
v The cables for all external SCSI devices are connected correctly.
v The last device in each SCSI chain, or the end of the SCSI cable, is
terminated correctly.
v Any external SCSI device is turned on. You must turn on an external SCSI
device before you turn on the server.
4. Reseat the failing device.
5. Replace the failing device.

50 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Power problems
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3550 M2 Type 7946,” on page 111 to determine which components
are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
Trained service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical
information, hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Symptom Action
The power-control button does 1. Make sure that the power-control button is working correctly:
not work, and the reset button
a. Disconnect the server power cords.
does work (the server does not
start). b. Reconnect the power cords.
Note: The power-control button c. (Trained service technician only) Reseat the operator information panel
will not function until cables, and then repeat steps 1a and 1b.
approximately 1 to 3 minutes v (Trained service technician only) If the server starts, reseat the operator
after the server has been information panel. If the problem remains, replace the operator
connected to ac power. information panel.
v If the server does not start, bypass the power-control button by using the
force power-on jumper (see “Internal LEDs, connectors, and jumpers” on
page 16). If the server starts, reseat the operator information panel. If the
problem remains, replace the operator information panel.
2. Make sure that the reset button is working correctly:
a. Disconnect the server power cords.
b. Reconnect the power cords.
c. (Trained service technician only) Reseat the light path diagnostics panel
cable, and then repeat steps 1a and 1b.
v (Trained service technician only) If the server starts, replace the light path
diagnostics panel.
v If the server does not start, go to step 3.
3. Make sure that:
v The power cords are correctly connected to the server and to a working
electrical outlet.
v The type of memory that is installed is correct.
v The DIMMs are fully seated.
v The LEDs on the power supply do not indicate a problem.
v The microprocessors are installed in the correct sequence.
4. Reseat the following components:
a. DIMMs
b. Power supplies
c. (Trained service technician only) Power switch connector
5. Replace the components listed in step 4 one at a time, in the order shown,
restarting the server each time.
6. If you just installed an optional device, remove it, and restart the server. If the
server now starts, you might have installed more devices than the power supply
supports.
7. See “Power-supply LEDs” on page 64.
8. See “Solving undetermined problems” on page 108.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 51
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3550 M2 Type 7946,” on page 111 to determine which components
are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
Trained service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical
information, hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Symptom Action
The server does not start. Check the four 12-volt power LEDs (A, B, C, and D) on the system board. See
“Internal LEDs, connectors, and jumpers” on page 16 for the LED locations.
1. If the Channel A power LED is lit, check components in the following order.
a. Remove all PCI adapters and riser cards. Try restarting the server. If the
server starts, reinstall the PCI adapters and riser cards, one at a time, to
isolate the defective adapter.
b. (Trained service technician only) System board
2. If the Channel B power LED is lit, check components in the following order:
a. Fans 1 and 2
b. (Trained service technician only) Remove microprocessor 2 (if present). Try
restarting the server.
c. (Trained service technician only) System board
3. If the Channel C power LED is lit, check components in the following order.
a. Fans 3 and 4
b. (Trained service technician only) System board
c. (Trained service technician only) Microprocessor 1
4. If the Channel D power LED is lit, check components in the following order:
a. Remove all DIMMs and restart the server. If the server restarts, reinstall the
DIMMs, one pair at a time, to isolate the defective DIMM (see “Installing a
memory module” on page 139).
b. Fans 5 and 6
c. (Trained service technician only) System board
The server does not turn off. 1. Determine whether you are using an Advanced Configuration and Power
Interface (ACPI) or a non-ACPI operating system. If you are using a non-ACPI
operating system, complete the following steps:
a. Press Ctrl+Alt+Delete.
b. Turn off the server by pressing the power-control button and hold it down
for 5 seconds.
c. Restart the server.
d. If the server fails POST and the power-control button does not work,
disconnect the ac power cord for 20 seconds; then, reconnect the ac power
cord and restart the server.
2. If the problem remains or if you are using an ACPI-aware operating system,
suspect the system board.
The server unexpectedly shuts See “Solving undetermined problems” on page 108.
down, and the LEDs on the
operator information panel are
not lit.

52 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Serial-device problems
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3550 M2 Type 7946,” on page 111 to determine which components
are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
Trained service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical
information, hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Symptom Action
The number of serial ports that 1. Make sure that:
are identified by the operating v Each port is assigned a unique address in the Setup utility and none of the
system is less than the number serial ports is disabled.
of installed serial ports. v The serial-port adapter (if one is present) is seated correctly.
2. Reseat the serial port adapter.
3. Replace the serial port adapter.
A serial device does not work. 1. Make sure that:
v The device is compatible with the server.
v The serial port is enabled and is assigned a unique address.
v The device is connected to the correct connector (see “Internal LEDs,
connectors, and jumpers” on page 16).
2. Reseat the following components:
a. Failing serial device
b. Serial cable
3. Replace the components listed in step 2 one at a time, in the order shown,
restarting the server each time.
4. (Trained service technician only) Replace the system board.

ServerGuide problems
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3550 M2 Type 7946,” on page 111 to determine which components
are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
Trained service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical
information, hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Symptom Action
™
The ServerGuide Setup and 1. Make sure that the server supports the ServerGuide program and has a
Installation CD will not start. startable (bootable) CD or DVD drive.
2. If the startup (boot) sequence settings have been changed, make sure that the
CD or DVD drive is first in the startup sequence.
3. If more than one CD or DVD drive is installed, make sure that only one drive is
set as the primary drive. Start the CD from the primary drive.
The MegaRAID Storage 1. Make sure that the hard disk drive is connected correctly.
Manager program cannot view
2. Make sure that the SAS/SATA hard disk drive cables are securely connected.
all installed drives, or the
operating system cannot be
installed.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 53
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3550 M2 Type 7946,” on page 111 to determine which components
are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
Trained service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical
information, hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Symptom Action
The operating-system Make more space available on the hard disk.
installation program
continuously loops.
The ServerGuide program will Make sure that the operating-system CD is supported by the ServerGuide program.
not start the operating-system For a list of supported operating-system versions, go to http://www.ibm.com/
CD. systems/management/serverguide/sub.html, click IBM Service and Support Site,
click the link for your ServerGuide version, and scroll down to the list of supported
Microsoft Windows operating systems.
The operating system cannot be Make sure that the server supports the operating system. If it does, either no
installed; the option is not logical drive is defined (SCSI RAID servers), or the ServerGuide System Partition
available. is not present. Run the ServerGuide program and make sure that setup is
complete.

Software problems
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3550 M2 Type 7946,” on page 111 to determine which components
are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
Trained service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical
information, hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Symptom Action
You suspect a software 1. To determine whether the problem is caused by the software, make sure that:
problem. v The server has the minimum memory that is needed to use the software. For
memory requirements, see the information that comes with the software. If
you have just installed an adapter or memory, the server might have a
memory-address conflict.
v The software is designed to operate on the server.
v Other software works on the server.
v The software works on another server.
2. If you received any error messages when using the software, see the
information that comes with the software for a description of the messages and
suggested solutions to the problem.
3. Contact the software vendor.

54 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Universal Serial Bus (USB) port problems
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3550 M2 Type 7946,” on page 111 to determine which components
are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
Trained service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical
information, hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Symptom Action
A USB device does not work. 1. Make sure that:
v The correct USB device driver is installed.
v The operating system supports USB devices.
v A standard PS/2 keyboard or mouse is not connected to the server. If it is, a
USB keyboard or mouse will not work during POST.
2. Make sure that the USB configuration options are set correctly in the Setup
utility (see “Using the Setup utility” on page 191 for more information).
3. If you are using a USB hub, disconnect the USB device from the hub and
connect it directly to the server.

Video problems
See “Monitor and video problems” on page 48.

Light path diagnostics

Light path diagnostics is a system of LEDs on various external and internal
components of the server. When an error occurs, LEDs are lit throughout the
server. By viewing the LEDs in a particular order, you can often identify the source
of the error.

When LEDs are lit to indicate an error, they remain lit when the server is turned off,
provided that the server is still connected to power and the power supply is
operating correctly.

Before you work inside the server to view light path diagnostics LEDs, read the
safety information that begins on page “Safety” on page vii and “Handling
static-sensitive devices” on page 121.

If an error occurs, view the light path diagnostics LEDs in the following order:
1. Look at the operator information panel on the front of the server.
v If the information LED is lit, it indicates that information about a suboptimal
condition in the server is available in the IMM system-event log or in the
system-error log.
v If the system-error LED is lit, it indicates that an error has occurred; go to
step 2.
The following illustration shows the operator information panel:

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 55
 2. To view the light path diagnostics panel, slide the blue release latch on the
operator panel to the left. Pull forward on the panel until the hinge of the
operator panel is free of the server chassis. Then pull down on the panel so that
you can view the light path diagnostics panel information. This reveals the light
path diagnostics panel. Lit LEDs on this panel indicate the type of error that has
occurred.

Note: When you slide the light path diagnostics panel out of the server to
check the LEDs or checkpoint codes, do not run the server continuously with
the light path diagnostics panel outside of the server. The panel should only be
outside of the server a short time. The light path diagnostics panel must remain
in the server when the server is running to ensure proper cooling.
The following illustration shows the light path diagnostics panel:

Note any LEDs that are lit, and then reinstall the light path diagnostics panel in
the server.

Note: When you slide the light path diagnostics panel out of the server to
check the LEDs or checkpoint codes, do not run the server continuously with
the light path diagnostics panel outside of the server. The panel should only be
outside of the server a short time. The light path diagnostics panel must remain
in the server when the server is running to ensure proper cooling.
Look at the system service label inside the server cover, which gives an
overview of internal components that correspond to the LEDs on the light path
diagnostics panel. This information and the information in “Light path diagnostics
LEDs” on page 58 can often provide enough information to diagnose the error.
3. Remove the server cover and look inside the server for lit LEDs. Certain
components inside the server have LEDs that are lit to indicate the location of a
problem.
The following illustration shows the LEDs and connectors on the system board.

56 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v Remind button: Press this button to place the system-error LED on the front
information panel into Remind mode. By placing the system-error LED indicator
in Remind mode, you acknowledge that you are aware of the last failure but will
not take immediate action to correct the problem. In Remind mode, the
system-error LED flashes rapidly until one of the following conditions occurs:
– All known errors are corrected.
– The server is restarted.
– A new error occurs, causing the system-error LED to be lit again.
v NMI button: The NMI button on the front panel will come on when this button is
pressed. Press this button to force a nonmaskable interrupt to the
microprocessor. You might have to use a pen or the end of a straightened paper
clip to press the button. It allows you to blue screen the server and take a
memory dump (use this button only when directed by the IBM service support).
v Checkpoint code display: This display provides a checkpoint code that
indicates the point at which the system stopped during the boot block and POST.
A checkpoint code is either a byte or a word value that is produced by UEFI. The
display does not provide error codes or suggest components to be replaced.
Checkpoint codes can be used by IBM service and support for more in-depth
troubleshooting. For more information about checkpoint codes, see “Checkpoint
codes (trained service technician only)” on page 38.
v Reset button: Press this button to reset the server and run the power-on
self-test (POST). You might have to use a pen or the end of a straightened paper
clip to press the button. The Reset button is in the lower-right corner of the light
path diagnostics panel.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 57
Light path diagnostics LEDs
The following table describes the LEDs on the light path diagnostics panel and
suggested actions to correct the detected problems.

Note: Check the system-error log or system event log for additional information
before replacing a FRU.
Table 5. Light path diagnostics panel LEDs

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 3, "Parts listing", in the Problem Determination and Service Guide to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If a action step is preceded by "(Trained service technician only)," that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
LED Description Action
None, but the An error has occurred and cannot Use the Setup utility to check the system error log for
system error LED be isolated. The error is not information about the error.
is lit. represented by a path.
OVER SPEC The power supplies are using If the OVER SPEC LED on the light path diagnostics panel is
more power than their maximum lit, or any of the six 12 V channel error LEDs (A, B, C, D, E,
rating. or AUX) on the system board are lit, use one of the following
procedures.

If the 12 V channel A error LED is lit, complete the following

steps:
1. Turn off the server and disconnect the power from the
server.
2. Remove the optical drive, fans, hard disk drives, and hard
disk drive backplane.
3. Restart the server to see whether the problem remains.
4. Reinstall each device that you removed in step 2 one at a
time, starting the server each time, to isolate the failing
device.
5. Replace any failing device.
6. (Trained service technician only) Replace the system
board.

If the 12 V channel B error LED is lit, complete the following

steps:
1. Turn off the server and disconnect the power from the
server.
2. Remove the PCI riser card in connector 1, all DIMMs, and
the microprocessor in socket 2.
3. Restart the server to see whether the problem remains.
4. Reinstall each device that you removed in step 2 one at a
time, starting the server each time, to isolate the failing
device.
5. Replace any failing device.
6. (Trained service technician only) Replace the system
board.

(Continued on the next page)

58 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Table 5. Light path diagnostics panel LEDs (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 3, "Parts listing", in the Problem Determination and Service Guide to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If a action step is preceded by "(Trained service technician only)," that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
LED Description Action
OVER SPEC The power supplies are using If the 12 V channel C error LED is lit, complete the following
(Continued) more power than their maximum steps:
rating. 1. Turn off the server and disconnect the power from the
server.
2. Remove the SAS/SATA RAID riser card, DIMMs in
connectors 1 through 8, and the microprocessor in socket
1.
Note: The server will not power-on when the
microprocessor in socket 1 is not installed in the server.
(Trained service technician only) Toggle the switch block
(SW4), bit 8 to allow the server to power-on. See
“System-board switches and jumpers” on page 18 for the
location of the SW4 switch block.
3. Restart the server to see whether the problem remains.
4. Reinstall each device that you removed in step 2 one at a
time, starting the server each time, to isolate the failing
device.
5. Replace any failing device.
6. (Trained service technician only) Replace the system
board.

If the 12 V channel D error LED is lit, complete the following

steps:
1. Turn off the server and disconnect the power from the
server.
2. Remove the microprocessor in socket 1.
Note: The server will not power-on when the
microprocessor in socket 1 is not installed in the server.
(Trained service technician only) Toggle the switch block
(SW4), bit 8 to allow the server to power-on.
“System-board switches and jumpers” on page 18 for the
location of the SW4 switch block.
3. Restart the server to see whether the problem remains.
4. Reinstall the microprocessor in socket 1 and restart the
server.
5. Replace any failing device.
6. (Trained service technician only) Replace the system
board.

(Continued on the next page.)

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 59
Table 5. Light path diagnostics panel LEDs (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 3, "Parts listing", in the Problem Determination and Service Guide to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If a action step is preceded by "(Trained service technician only)," that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
LED Description Action
OVER SPEC The power supplies are using If the 12 V channel E error LED is lit, complete the following
(Continued) more power than their maximum steps:
rating. 1. Turn off the server and disconnect the power from the
server.
2. Remove the PCI riser card from PCI riser connector 2 and
the microprocessor in socket 2.
3. Restart the server to see whether the problem remains.
4. Reinstall each device that you removed in step 2 one at a
time, starting the server each time, to isolate the failing
device.
5. Replace any failing device.
6. (Trained service technician only) Replace the system
board.

If the 12 V AUX channel error LED is lit, complete the

following steps:
1. Turn off the server and disconnect the power from the
server.
2. Remove all PCI Express and PCI-X cards, all PCI riser
cards, the operator information panel, and the Ethernet
adapter (if installed).
Note: The server will not power-on when the operator
information panel is not installed in the server. Toggle the
switch block (SW3), bit 6 to allow the server to power-on.
See “System-board switches and jumpers” on page 18 for
the location of the SW3 switch block.
3. Restart the server to see whether the problem remains.
4. Reinstall each device that was removed in step 2 one at a
time, starting the server each time, to isolate the failing
device.
5. Replace any failing device.
6. (Trained service technician only) Replace the system
board.
LOG An error occurred. Check the IMM system event log and the system-error log for
information about the error. Replace any components that are
identified in the error logs.
LINK Reserved.
PS Power supply 1 or 2 has failed. 1. Check the power-supply that has an lit amber LED (see
“Power-supply LEDs” on page 64).
2. Make sure that the power supplies are seated correctly.
3. Remove one of the power supplies to isolate the failed
power supply.
4. Replace the failed power supply.

60 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Table 5. Light path diagnostics panel LEDs (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 3, "Parts listing", in the Problem Determination and Service Guide to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If a action step is preceded by "(Trained service technician only)," that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
LED Description Action
PCI An error has occurred on a PCI 1. Check the LEDs on the PCI slots to identify the
bus or on the system board. An component that caused the error.
additional LED is lit next to a
2. Check the system-error log for information about the error.
failing PCI slot.
3. If you cannot isolate the failing adapter by using the LEDs
and the information in the system-error log, remove one
adapter at a time from the failing PCI bus; and restart the
server after each adapter is removed.
4. Replace the following components, in the order shown,
restarting the server each time:
v PCI riser card
v (Trained service technician only) Replace the system
board.
5. For more information, go to http://www.ibm.com/systems/
support/supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
SP A service processor error has 1. Remove power from the server; then, reconnect the server
been detected. to power and restart the server.
2. Update the IMM firmware (see “Updating the firmware” on
page 187).
3. (Trained service technician only) Replace the system
board, if the problem remains.
4. For more information, go to http://www.ibm.com/systems/
support/supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
FAN A fan has failed, is operating too 1. Reseat the failing fan, which is indicated by a lit LED near
slowly, or has been removed. The the fan connector on the system board.
TEMP LED might also be lit.
2. Replace the failing fan.
TEMP The system temperature has 1. Make sure that the heat sink is seated correctly.
exceeded a threshold level. A
2. Determine whether a fan has failed. If it has, replace it.
failing fan can cause the TEMP
LED to be lit. 3. Make sure that the room temperature is not too high. See
Table 1 on page 8 for the server temperature information.
4. Make sure that the air vents are not blocked.
5. For more information, go to http://www.ibm.com/systems/
support/supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 61
Table 5. Light path diagnostics panel LEDs (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 3, "Parts listing", in the Problem Determination and Service Guide to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If a action step is preceded by "(Trained service technician only)," that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
LED Description Action
MEM An invalid memory configuration 1. If the MEM LED and the CNFG LED are lit, the system
or a memory error has occurred issues an invalid memory configuration error. Complete
(both the MEM LED and CNFG the following steps to correct the problem:
LED might be lit).
a. Make sure that the DIMM configuration is supported
(see “Installing a memory module” on page 139 for
DIMM requirements and installation sequence
information).
b. Replace the DIMMs with a supported configuration.
2. If the CNFG LED is not lit, the system might detect a
memory error. Complete the following steps to correct the
problem:
a. Run the memory test to isolate the problem.
b. If the test indicates that a memory error has occurred,
replace the failing DIMM, which is indicated by the lit
DIMM latch on the system board (the DIMM LED is
underneath the DIMM latch).
NMI A nonmaskable interrupt has Check the system-error log for information about the error.
occurred, or the NMI button was
pressed.
CNFG A hardware configuration error 1. If the CNFG LED and the CPU LED are lit, complete the
has occurred. following steps to correct the problem:
a. Check the microprocessors that were just installed to
make sure that they are compatible with each other
(see “Installing a microprocessor and heat sink” on
page 178 for additional information about
microprocessor requirements).
b. (Trained service technician only) Replace the
incompatible microprocessor.
c. Check the system-error logs for information about the
error. Replace any components that are identified in
the error log.
2. If the CNFG LED and the MEM LED are lit, complete the
following steps:
a. Make sure that the DIMM configuration is supported
(see “Installing a memory module” on page 139 for
DIMM requirements and installation sequence
information).
b. Replace the DIMMs with a supported configuration.

62 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Table 5. Light path diagnostics panel LEDs (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 3, "Parts listing", in the Problem Determination and Service Guide to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If a action step is preceded by "(Trained service technician only)," that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
LED Description Action
CPU An invalid microprocessor 1. If the CNFG LED is lit, the system issues an invalid
configuration or a microprocessor microprocessor configuration error. Complete the following
has failed (both the CPU LED and steps to correct the problem:
the CNFG LED might be lit).
a. Check the microprocessors that were just installed to
make sure that they are compatible with each other
(see “Installing a microprocessor and heat sink” on
page 178 for additional information about
microprocessor requirements) and use the Setup utility
and select System Information → System Summary
→ Processor Details to verify the microprocessors
information.
b. (Trained service technician only) Replace the
incompatible microprocessor.
c. Check the system-error logs for information about the
error. Replace any components that are identified in
the error log.
2. If a microprocessor failure occurs, complete the following
steps:
a. (Trained service technician only) Make sure that the
failing microprocessor, which is indicated by a lit LED
on the system board, is installed correctly. See
“Installing a microprocessor and heat sink” on page
178 for information about installation and
requirements.
b. For more information, go to http://www.ibm.com/
systems/support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
VRM Reserved.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 63
Table 5. Light path diagnostics panel LEDs (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 3, "Parts listing", in the Problem Determination and Service Guide to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If a action step is preceded by "(Trained service technician only)," that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
LED Description Action
DASD A hard disk drive has failed or is 1. Check the LEDs on the hard disk drives for the drive with
missing. a lit status LED and reseat the hard disk drive.
2. Reseat the hard disk drive backplane.
3. For more information, see “Hard disk drive problems” on
page 40.
4. If the error remains, replace the following components in
the order listed, restarting the server after each:
a. Replace the hard disk drive.
b. Replace the hard disk drive backplane.
5. If the error remains, replace the following components one
at a time, in the order listed, restarting the server after
each:
a. Replace the hard disk drive.
b. Replace the hard disk drive backplane.
6. If the problem remains, go to http://www.ibm.com/systems/
support/supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
RAID Reserved.
BRD An error has occurred on the 1. Check the LEDs on the system board to identify the
system board. component that caused the error. The BRD LED can be lit
due to any of the following reasons:
v Battery
v Missing PCI riser-card assembly
v Failed voltage regulator
2. Check the system-error log for information about the error.
3. Replace any failed or missing replacement components,
such as the battery or PCI riser-card assembly.
4. If a voltage regulator has failed, (trained service technician
only) replace the system board.

Power-supply LEDs
The following minimum configuration is required for the DC LED on the power
supply to be lit:
v Power supply
v Power cord

The following minimum configuration is required for the server to start:

v One microprocessor in microprocessor socket 1
v One 1 GB DIMM on the system board
v One power supply
v Power cord

64 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
 v Three cooling fans (one for each zone)

The following illustration shows the locations of the power-supply LEDs.

The following table describes the problems that are indicated by various
combinations of the power-supply LEDs and the power-on LED on the operator
information panel and suggested actions to correct the detected problems.

Power-supply LEDs
AC DC Error Description Action Notes
Off Off Off No ac power to the 1. Check the ac power to the This is a normal
server or a problem server. condition when no ac
with the ac power power is present.
2. Make sure that the power
source.
cord is connected to a
functioning power source.
3. Restart the server. If the error
remains, check the
power-supply LEDs.
4. Replace the power-supply.
Off Off On No ac power to the v Make sure that the power cord This happens only
server or a problem is connected to a functioning when a second power
with the ac power power source. supply is providing
source and the power to the server.
v Replace the power supply.
power-supply had
detected an internal
problem.
Off On Off Faulty Replace the power supply.
power-supply
Off On On Faulty Replace the power supply.
power-supply
On Off Off Power-supply not 1. Reseat the power supply. Typically indicates a
fully seated, faulty power-supply is not
2. If the 240 V failure LED on
system board, or fully seated.
the system board is not lit,
faulty power-supply
replace the power-supply.
3. If the 240 V failure LED on
the system board is lit,
(trained service technician
only) replace the system
board.
On Off On Faulty Replace the power supply.
power-supply
On On Off Normal operation
On On On Power-supply is Replace the power supply.
faulty but still
operational

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 65
System pulse LEDs
The following LEDs are on the system board and monitors the system power-on
and power-off sequencing and boot progress (see “System-board LEDs” on page
20 for the location of these LEDs):
Table 6. System pulse LEDs
LED Description Action
Enclosure manager heartbeat power-on and power-off sequencing. 1. If the LED blinks at 1Hz, it is
functioning properly and no action
is necessary.
2. If the LED is not blinking, (trained
service technician only) replace
the system board.
IMM heartbeat IMM heartbeat boot process. The following steps describe the
different stages of the IMM heartbeat
sequencing process.
1. When this LED is blinking fast
(approximately 4Hz), this
indicates, that the IMM code is in
the loading process.
2. When this LED goes off
momentarily, this indicates that
the IMM code has loaded
completely.
3. When this LED goes off
momentarily and then starts
blinking slowing (approximately
1Hz), this indicates that IMM is
fully operational. You can now
press the power-control button to
power-on the server.
4. If this LED does not blink within
30 seconds of connecting a power
source to the server, complete the
following steps:
a. (Trained service technician
only) use the IMM recovery
jumper to recover the firmware
(see Table 2 on page 18).
b. (Trained service technician
only) replace the system
board.

Diagnostic programs and messages

The diagnostic programs are the primary method of testing the major components
of the server. As you run the diagnostic programs, text messages are displayed on
the screen and are saved in the test log. A diagnostic text message indicates that a
problem has been detected and provides the action you should take as a result of
the text message.

66 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
 Make sure that the server has the latest version of the diagnostic programs. To
download the latest version, complete the following steps.

Note: Changes are made periodically to the IBM Web site. The actual procedure
might vary slightly from what is described in this document.
1. Go to http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/.
2. Under Product support, click System x.
3. Under Popular links, click Software and device drivers.
4. Click IBM System x3550 M2 to display the matrix of downloadable files for the
server.

Utilities are available to reset and update the diagnostics code on the integrated
USB flash device, if the diagnostic partition becomes damaged and does not start
the diagnostic programs. For more information and to download the utilities, go to
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/supportsite.wss/docdisplay?lndocid=MIGR-
5072294&brandind=5000008.

Running the diagnostic programs

To run the diagnostic programs, complete the following steps:
1. If the server is running, turn off the server and all attached devices.
2. Turn on all attached devices; then, turn on the server.
3. When the prompt <F2> Diagnostics is displayed, press F2.

Note: The DSA Preboot diagnostic program might appear to be unresponsive

for an unusual length of time when you start the program. This is normal
operation while the program loads.
4. Optionally, select Quit to DSA to exit from the stand-alone memory diagnostic
program.

Note: After you exit from the stand-alone memory diagnostic environment, you
must restart the server to access the stand-alone memory diagnostic
environment again.
5. Select gui to display the graphical user interface, or select cmd to display the
DSA interactive menu.
6. Follow the instructions on the screen to select the diagnostic test to run.

If the diagnostic programs do not detect any hardware errors but the problem
remains during normal server operation, a software error might be the cause. If you
suspect a software problem, see the information that comes with your software.

A single problem might cause more than one error message. When this happens,
correct the cause of the first error message. The other error messages usually will
not occur the next time you run the diagnostic programs.

Exception: If multiple error codes or light path diagnostics LEDs indicate a

microprocessor error, the error might be in a microprocessor or in a microprocessor
socket. See “Microprocessor problems” on page 47 for information about diagnosing
microprocessor problems.

If the server stops during testing and you cannot continue, restart the server and try
running the diagnostic programs again. If the problem remains, replace the
component that was being tested when the server stopped.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 67
Diagnostic text messages
Diagnostic text messages are displayed while the tests are running. A diagnostic
text message contains one of the following results:

Passed: The test was completed without any errors.

Failed: The test detected an error.

Aborted: The test could not proceed because of the server configuration

Additional information concerning test failures is available in the extended

diagnostic results for each test.

Viewing the test log

To view the test log when the tests are completed, type the view command in the
DSA interactive menu, or select Diagnostic Event Log in the graphical user
interface. To transfer DSA Preboot collections to an external USB device, type the
copy command in the DSA interactive menu.

Diagnostic messages
The following table describes the messages that the diagnostic programs might
generate and suggested actions to correct the detected problems. Follow the
suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the column.

68 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Table 7. DSA Preboot messages
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3550 M2 Type 7946,” on page 111 to determine which components are customer
replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical information, hints, tips,
and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
089-801-xxx CPU CPU Stress Aborted Internal 1. Turn off and restart the system.
Test program error.
2. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the system firmware is at the
latest level. The installed firmware level is shown
in the DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD
section for this component. For more
information, see “Updating the firmware” on
page 187.
5. Run the test again.
6. Turn off and restart the system if necessary to
recover from a hung state.
7. Run the test again.
8. Replace the following components one at a time,
in the order shown, and run this test again to
determine whether the problem has been solved:
a. (Trained service technician only)
Microprocessor board
b. (Trained service technician only)
Microprocessor
9. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 69
Table 7. DSA Preboot messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3550 M2 Type 7946,” on page 111 to determine which components are customer
replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical information, hints, tips,
and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
089-802-xxx CPU CPU Stress Aborted System 1. Turn off and restart the system.
Test resource
availability 2. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
error. level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the system firmware is at the
latest level. The installed firmware level is shown
in the DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD
section for this component. For the latest level of
firmware, go to http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1 MIGR-4JTS2T and select
your system to display a matrix of available
firmware.
5. Run the test again.
6. Turn off and restart the system if necessary to
recover from a hung state.
7. Run the test again.
8. Make sure that the system firmware is at the
latest level. The installed firmware level is shown
in the DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD
section for this component. For more
information, see “Updating the firmware” on
page 187.
9. Run the test again.
089-802-xxx CPU CPU Stress Aborted System 1. Replace the following components one at a time,
Test resource in the order shown, and run this test again to
availability determine whether the problem has been solved:
error.
a. (Trained service technician only)
Microprocessor board
b. (Trained service technician only)
Microprocessor
2. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

70 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Table 7. DSA Preboot messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3550 M2 Type 7946,” on page 111 to determine which components are customer
replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical information, hints, tips,
and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
089-901-xxx CPU CPU Stress Failed Test failure. 1. Turn off and restart the system if necessary to
Test recover from a hung state.
2. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the system firmware is at the
latest level. The installed firmware level is shown
in the DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD
section for this component. For more
information, see “Updating the firmware” on
page 187.
5. Run the test again.
6. Turn off and restart the system if necessary to
recover from a hung state.
7. Run the test again.
8. Replace the following components one at a time,
in the order shown, and run this test again to
determine whether the problem has been solved:
a. (Trained service technician only)
Microprocessor board
b. (Trained service technician only)
Microprocessor
9. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 71
Table 7. DSA Preboot messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3550 M2 Type 7946,” on page 111 to determine which components are customer
replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical information, hints, tips,
and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
166-801-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
stopped: the power source. You must disconnect the system
IMM returned from ac power to reset the IMM.
an incorrect
response 2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
length. power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest
level. The installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD section
for this component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 187.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
166-802-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
stopped: the power source. You must disconnect the system
test cannot be from ac power to reset the IMM.
completed for
an unknown 2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
reason. power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest
level. The installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD section
for this component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 187.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

72 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Table 7. DSA Preboot messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3550 M2 Type 7946,” on page 111 to determine which components are customer
replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical information, hints, tips,
and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
166-803-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
stopped: the power source. You must disconnect the system
node is busy; from ac power to reset the IMM.
try later.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest
level. The installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD section
for this component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 187.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
166-804-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
stopped: invalid power source. You must disconnect the system
command. from ac power to reset the IMM.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest
level. The installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD section
for this component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 187.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 73
Table 7. DSA Preboot messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3550 M2 Type 7946,” on page 111 to determine which components are customer
replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical information, hints, tips,
and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
166-805-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
stopped: invalid power source. You must disconnect the system
command for from ac power to reset the IMM.
the given LUN.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest
level. The installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD section
for this component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 187.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
166-806-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
stopped: power source. You must disconnect the system
timeout while from ac power to reset the IMM.
processing the
command. 2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest
level. The installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD section
for this component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 187.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

74 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Table 7. DSA Preboot messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3550 M2 Type 7946,” on page 111 to determine which components are customer
replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical information, hints, tips,
and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
166-807-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
stopped: out of power source. You must disconnect the system
space. from ac power to reset the IMM.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest
level. The installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD section
for this component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 187.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
166-808-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
stopped: power source. You must disconnect the system
reservation from ac power to reset the IMM.
canceled or
invalid 2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
reservation ID. power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest
level. The installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD section
for this component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 187.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 75
Table 7. DSA Preboot messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3550 M2 Type 7946,” on page 111 to determine which components are customer
replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical information, hints, tips,
and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
166-809-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
stopped: power source. You must disconnect the system
request data from ac power to reset the IMM.
was truncated.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest
level. The installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD section
for this component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 187.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
166-810-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
stopped: power source. You must disconnect the system
request data from ac power to reset the IMM.
length is
invalid. 2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest
level. The installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD section
for this component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 187.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

76 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Table 7. DSA Preboot messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3550 M2 Type 7946,” on page 111 to determine which components are customer
replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical information, hints, tips,
and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
166-811-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
stopped: power source. You must disconnect the system
request data from ac power to reset the IMM.
field length limit
is exceeded. 2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest
level. The installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD section
for this component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 187.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
166-812-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C Test 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
stopped a power source. You must disconnect the system
parameter is from ac power to reset the IMM.
out of range.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest
level. The installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD section
for this component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 187.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 77
Table 7. DSA Preboot messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3550 M2 Type 7946,” on page 111 to determine which components are customer
replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical information, hints, tips,
and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
166-813-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
stopped: power source. You must disconnect the system
cannot return from ac power to reset the IMM.
the number of
requested data 2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
bytes. power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest
level. The installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD section
for this component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 187.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
166-814-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
stopped: power source. You must disconnect the system
requested from ac power to reset the IMM.
sensor, data, or
record is not 2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
present. power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest
level. The installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD section
for this component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 187.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

78 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Table 7. DSA Preboot messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3550 M2 Type 7946,” on page 111 to determine which components are customer
replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical information, hints, tips,
and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
166-815-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
stopped: invalid power source. You must disconnect the system
data field in the from ac power to reset the IMM.
request.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest
level. The installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD section
for this component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 187.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
166-816-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
stopped: the power source. You must disconnect the system
command is from ac power to reset the IMM.
illegal for the
specified 2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
sensor or power source and turn on the system.
record type. 3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest
level. The installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD section
for this component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 187.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 79
Table 7. DSA Preboot messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3550 M2 Type 7946,” on page 111 to determine which components are customer
replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical information, hints, tips,
and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
166-817-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
stopped: a power source. You must disconnect the system
command from ac power to reset the IMM.
response could
not be 2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
provided. power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest
level. The installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD section
for this component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 187.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
166-818-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
stopped: power source. You must disconnect the system
cannot execute from ac power to reset the IMM.
a duplicated
request. 2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest
level. The installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD section
for this component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 187.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

80 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Table 7. DSA Preboot messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3550 M2 Type 7946,” on page 111 to determine which components are customer
replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical information, hints, tips,
and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
166-819-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
stopped: a power source. You must disconnect the system
command from ac power to reset the IMM.
response could
not be 2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
provided; the power source and turn on the system.
SDR repository 3. Run the test again.
is in update 4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
mode. level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest
level. The installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD section
for this component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 187.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
166-820-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
stopped: a power source. You must disconnect the system
command from ac power to reset the IMM.
response could
not be 2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
provided; the power source and turn on the system.
device is in 3. Run the test again.
firmware 4. Make sure that the DSA code and IMM firmware
update mode. are at the latest level.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest
level. The installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD section
for this component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 187.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 81
Table 7. DSA Preboot messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3550 M2 Type 7946,” on page 111 to determine which components are customer
replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical information, hints, tips,
and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
166-821-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
stopped: a power source. You must disconnect the system
command from ac power to reset the IMM.
response could
not be 2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
provided; IMM power source and turn on the system.
initialization is 3. Run the test again.
in progress. 4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest
level. The installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD section
for this component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 187.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
166-822-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
stopped: the power source. You must disconnect the system
destination is from ac power to reset the IMM.
unavailable.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest
level. The installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD section
for this component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 187.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

82 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Table 7. DSA Preboot messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3550 M2 Type 7946,” on page 111 to determine which components are customer
replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical information, hints, tips,
and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
166-823-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
stopped: power source. You must disconnect the system
cannot execute from ac power to reset the IMM.
the command;
insufficient 2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
privilege level. power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest
level. The installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD section
for this component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 187.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
166-824-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
stopped: power source. You must disconnect the system
cannot execute from ac power to reset the IMM.
the command.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest
level. The installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD section
for this component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 187.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 83
Table 7. DSA Preboot messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3550 M2 Type 7946,” on page 111 to determine which components are customer
replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical information, hints, tips,
and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
166-901-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Failed The IMM 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
indicates a power source. You must disconnect the system
failure in the from ac power to reset the IMM.
H8 bus (Bus 0)
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the
latest level. The installed firmware level is
shown in the DSA event log in the
Firmware/VPD section for this component. For
more information, see “Updating the firmware”
on page 187.
6. Run the test again.
7. Remove power from the system.
8. (Trained service technician only) Replace the
system board.
9. Reconnect the system to power and turn on the
system.
10. Run the test again.
11. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site
for more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

84 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Table 7. DSA Preboot messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3550 M2 Type 7946,” on page 111 to determine which components are customer
replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical information, hints, tips,
and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
166-902-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Failed The IMM 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
indicates a power source. You must disconnect the system
failure in the from ac power to reset the IMM.
light path bus
(Bus 1). 2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the
latest level. The installed firmware level is
shown in the DSA event log in the
Firmware/VPD section for this component. For
more information, see “Updating the firmware”
on page 187.
6. Run the test again.
7. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
power source.
8. Reseat the light path diagnostics panel.
9. Reconnect the system to the power source and
turn on the system.
10. Run the test again.
11. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
power source.
12. (Trained service technician only) Replace the
system board.
13. Reconnect the system to the power source and
turn on the system.
14. Run the test again.
166-902-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Failed The IMM 1. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
indicates a more troubleshooting information at
failure in the http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
memory bus. supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 85
Table 7. DSA Preboot messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3550 M2 Type 7946,” on page 111 to determine which components are customer
replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical information, hints, tips,
and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
166-903-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Failed The IMM 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
indicates a power source. You must disconnect the system
failure in the from ac power to reset the IMM.
DIMM bus (Bus
2). 2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the
latest level. The installed firmware level is
shown in the DSA event log in the
Firmware/VPD section for this component. For
more information, see “Updating the firmware”
on page 187.
6. Run the test again.
7. Disconnect the system from the power source.
8. Replace the DIMMs one at a time, and run the
test again after replacing each DIMM.
9. Reconnect the system to the power source and
turn on the system.
10. Run the test again.
11. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
power source.
12. Reseat all of the DIMMs.
13. Reconnect the system to the power source and
turn on the system.
14. Run the test again.
15. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
power source.
16. (Trained service technician only) Replace the
system board.
17. Reconnect the system to the power source and
turn on the system.
18. Run the test again.
19. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site
for more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

86 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Table 7. DSA Preboot messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3550 M2 Type 7946,” on page 111 to determine which components are customer
replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical information, hints, tips,
and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
166-904-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Failed The IMM 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
indicates a power source. You must disconnect the system
failure in the from ac power to reset the IMM.
power supply
bus (Bus 3). 2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the
latest level. The installed firmware level is
shown in the DSA event log in the
Firmware/VPD section for this component. For
more information, see “Updating the firmware”
on page 187.
6. Run the test again.
7. Reseat the power supply.
8. Run the test again.
9. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
power source.
10. Trained service technician only) Replace the
system board.
11. Reconnect the system to the power source and
turn on the system.
12. Run the test again.
13. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site
for more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 87
Table 7. DSA Preboot messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3550 M2 Type 7946,” on page 111 to determine which components are customer
replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical information, hints, tips,
and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
166-905-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Failed The IMM Note: Ignore the error if the hard disk drive
indicates a backplane is not installed.
failure in the 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
HDD bus (Bus power source. You must disconnect the system
4). from ac power to reset the IMM.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the
latest level. The installed firmware level is
shown in the DSA event log in the
Firmware/VPD section for this component. For
more information, see “Updating the firmware”
on page 187.
6. Run the test again.
7. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
power source.
8. Reseat the hard disk drive backplane.
9. Reconnect the system to the power source and
turn on the system.
10. Run the test again.
11. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
power source.
12. Trained service technician only) Replace the
system board.
13. Reconnect the system to the power source and
turn on the system.
14. Run the test again.
15. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site
for more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

88 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Table 7. DSA Preboot messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3550 M2 Type 7946,” on page 111 to determine which components are customer
replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical information, hints, tips,
and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
166-906-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Failed The IMM 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
indicates a power source. You must disconnect the system
failure in the from ac power to reset the IMM.
memory
configuration 2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
bus (Bus 5). power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the
latest level. The installed firmware level is
shown in the DSA event log in the
Firmware/VPD section for this component. For
more information, see “Updating the firmware”
on page 187.
6. Run the test again.
7. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
power source.
8. Trained service technician only) Replace the
system board.
9. Reconnect the system to the power source and
turn on the system.
10. Run the test again.
11. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site
for more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
201-801-xxx Memory Memory Test Aborted Test canceled: 1. Turn off and restart the system.
the system
UEFI 2. Run the test again.
programmed 3. Make sure that the server firmware is at the
the memory latest level. The installed firmware level is shown
controller with in the DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD
an invalid section for this component. For more
CBAR address information, see “Updating the firmware” on
page 187.
4. Run the test again.
5. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 89
Table 7. DSA Preboot messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3550 M2 Type 7946,” on page 111 to determine which components are customer
replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical information, hints, tips,
and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
201-802-xxx Memory Memory Test Aborted Test canceled: 1. Turn off and restart the system.
the end
address in the 2. Run the test again.
E820 function 3. Make sure that all DIMMs are enabled in the
is less than 16 Setup utility.
MB. 4. Make sure that the server firmware is at the
latest level. The installed firmware level is shown
in the DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD
section for this component. For more
information, see “Updating the firmware” on
page 187.
5. Run the test again.
6. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
201-803-xxx Memory Memory Test Aborted Test canceled: 1. Turn off and restart the system.
could not
enable the 2. Run the test again.
processor 3. Make sure that the server firmware is at the
cache. latest level. The installed firmware level is shown
in the DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD
section for this component. For more
information, see “Updating the firmware” on
page 187.
4. Run the test again.
5. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
201-804-xxx Memory Memory Test Aborted Test canceled: 1. Turn off and restart the system.
the memory
controller buffer 2. Run the test again.
request failed. 3. Make sure that the server firmware is at the
latest level. The installed firmware level is shown
in the DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD
section for this component. For more
information, see “Updating the firmware” on
page 187.
4. Run the test again.
5. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

90 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Table 7. DSA Preboot messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3550 M2 Type 7946,” on page 111 to determine which components are customer
replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical information, hints, tips,
and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
201-805-xxx Memory Memory Test Aborted Test canceled: 1. Turn off and restart the system.
the memory
controller 2. Run the test again.
display/alter 3. Make sure that the server firmware is at the
write operation latest level. The installed firmware level is shown
was not in the DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD
completed. section for this component. For more
information, see “Updating the firmware” on
page 187.
4. Run the test again.
5. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
201-806-xxx Memory Memory Test Aborted Test canceled: 1. Turn off and restart the system.
the memory
controller fast 2. Run the test again.
scrub operation 3. Make sure that the server firmware is at the
was not latest level. The installed firmware level is shown
completed. in the DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD
section for this component. For more
information, see “Updating the firmware” on
page 187.
4. Run the test again.
5. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
201-807-xxx Memory Memory Test Aborted Test canceled: 1. Turn off and restart the system.
the memory
controller buffer 2. Run the test again.
free request 3. Make sure that the server firmware is at the
failed. latest level. The installed firmware level is shown
in the DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD
section for this component. For more
information, see “Updating the firmware” on
page 187.
4. Run the test again.
5. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 91
Table 7. DSA Preboot messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3550 M2 Type 7946,” on page 111 to determine which components are customer
replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical information, hints, tips,
and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
201-808-xxx Memory Memory Test Aborted Test canceled: 1. Turn off and restart the system.
memory
controller 2. Run the test again.
display/alter 3. Make sure that the server firmware is at the
buffer execute latest level. The installed firmware level is shown
error. in the DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD
section for this component. For more
information, see “Updating the firmware” on
page 187.
4. Run the test again.
5. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
201-809-xxx Memory Memory Test Aborted Test canceled 1. Turn off and restart the system.
program error:
operation 2. Run the test again.
running fast 3. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
scrub. level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
4. Make sure that the server firmware is at the
latest level. The installed firmware level is shown
in the DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD
section for this component. For more
information, see “Updating the firmware” on
page 187.
5. Run the test again.
6. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

92 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Table 7. DSA Preboot messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3550 M2 Type 7946,” on page 111 to determine which components are customer
replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical information, hints, tips,
and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
201-810-xxx Memory Memory Test Aborted Test stopped: 1. Turn off and restart the system.
unknown error
code xxx 2. Run the test again.
received in 3. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
COMMONEXIT level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
procedure. http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
4. Make sure that the server firmware is at the
latest level. The installed firmware level is shown
in the DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD
section for this component. For more
information, see “Updating the firmware” on
page 187.
5. Run the test again.
6. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
201-901-xxx Memory Memory Test Failed Test failure: 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
single-bit error, power source.
failing DIMM z.
2. Reseat DIMM z.
3. Reconnect the system to power and turn on the
system.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the server firmware is at the
latest level. The installed firmware level is
shown in the DSA event log in the
Firmware/VPD section for this component. For
more information, see “Updating the firmware”
on page 187.
6. Run the test again.
7. Replace the failing DIMMs.
8. Re-enable all memory in the Setup utility (see
“Using the Setup utility” on page 191).
9. Run the test again.
10. Replace the failing DIMM.
11. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site
for more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 93
Table 7. DSA Preboot messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3550 M2 Type 7946,” on page 111 to determine which components are customer
replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical information, hints, tips,
and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
201-902-xxx Memory Memory Test Failed Test failure: 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
single-bit and power source.
multi-bit error,
failing DIMM z 2. Reseat DIMM z.
3. Reconnect the system to power and turn on the
system.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the server firmware is at the
latest level. The installed firmware level is
shown in the DSA event log in the
Firmware/VPD section for this component. For
more information, see “Updating the firmware”
on page 187.
6. Run the test again.
7. Replace the failing DIMMs.
8. Re-enable all memory in the Setup utility see
“Using the Setup utility” on page 191).
9. Run the test again.
10. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site
for more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
202-801-xxx Memory Memory Aborted Internal 1. Turn off and restart the system.
Stress Test program error.
2. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
3. Make sure that the server firmware is at the
latest level. The installed firmware level is shown
in the DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD
section for this component. For more
information, see “Updating the firmware” on
page 187.
4. Run the test again.
5. Turn off and restart the system if necessary to
recover from a hung state.
6. Run the memory diagnostics to identify the
specific failing DIMM.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

94 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Table 7. DSA Preboot messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3550 M2 Type 7946,” on page 111 to determine which components are customer
replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical information, hints, tips,
and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
202-802-xxx Memory Memory Failed General error: 1. Make sure that all memory is enabled by
Stress Test memory size is checking the Available System Memory in the
insufficient to Resource Utilization section of the DSA event
run the test. log. If necessary, enable all memory in the Setup
utility (see “Using the Setup utility” on page 191).
2. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
3. Run the test again.
4. Run the standard memory test to validate all
memory.
5. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
202-901-xxx Memory Memory Failed Test failure. 1. Run the standard memory test to validate all
Stress Test memory.
2. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
3. Turn off the system and disconnect it from
power.
4. Reseat the DIMMs.
5. Reconnect the system to power and turn on the
system.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 95
Table 7. DSA Preboot messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3550 M2 Type 7946,” on page 111 to determine which components are customer
replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical information, hints, tips,
and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
215-801-xxx Optical Drive v Verify Aborted Unable to 1. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
Media communicate level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
Installed with the device http://www.ibm.com/support/
driver. docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
v Read/
Write Test 2. Run the test again.
v Self-Test 3. Check the drive cabling at both ends for loose
or broken connections or damage to the cable.
Messages Replace the cable if it is damaged.
and actions 4. Run the test again.
apply to all
three tests. 5. For additional troubleshooting information, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1MIGR-41559.
6. Run the test again.
7. Make sure that the system firmware is at the
latest level. The installed firmware level is
shown in the DSA event log in the
Firmware/VPD section for this component. For
more information, see “Updating the firmware”
on page 187.
8. Run the test again.
9. Replace the CD/DVD drive.
10. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site
for more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

96 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Table 7. DSA Preboot messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3550 M2 Type 7946,” on page 111 to determine which components are customer
replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical information, hints, tips,
and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
215-802-xxx Optical Drive v Verify Aborted The media tray 1. Close the media tray and wait 15 seconds.
Media is open.
2. Run the test again.
Installed
3. Insert a new CD/DVD into the drive and wait
v Read/ for 15 seconds for the media to be recognized.
Write Test
4. Run the test again.
v Self-Test
5. Check the drive cabling at both ends for loose
Messages or broken connections or damage to the cable.
and actions Replace the cable if it is damaged.
apply to all 6. Run the test again.
three tests. 7. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
8. Run the test again.
9. For additional troubleshooting information, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1MIGR-41559.
10. Run the test again.
11. Replace the CD/DVD drive.
12. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site
for more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
215-803-xxx Optical Drive v Verify Failed The disc might 1. Wait for the system activity to stop.
Media be in use by
the system. 2. Run the test again
Installed
3. Turn off and restart the system.
v Read/
4. Run the test again.
Write Test
5. Replace the CD/DVD drive.
v Self-Test
6. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
Messages more troubleshooting information at
and actions http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
apply to all supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
three tests. &lndocid=SERV-CALL.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 97
Table 7. DSA Preboot messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3550 M2 Type 7946,” on page 111 to determine which components are customer
replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical information, hints, tips,
and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
215-901-xxx Optical Drive v Verify Aborted Drive media is 1. Insert a CD/DVD into the drive or try a new
Media not detected. media, and wait for 15 seconds.
Installed 2. Run the test again.
v Read/ 3. Check the drive cabling at both ends for loose or
Write Test broken connections or damage to the cable.
v Self-Test Replace the cable if it is damaged.
4. Run the test again.
Messages
and actions 5. For additional troubleshooting information, go to
apply to all http://www.ibm.com/support/
three tests. docview.wss?uid=psg1MIGR-41559.
6. Run the test again.
7. Replace the CD/DVD drive.
8. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
215-902-xxx Optical Drive v Verify Failed Read 1. Insert a CD/DVD into the drive or try a new
Media miscompare. media, and wait for 15 seconds.
Installed 2. Run the test again.
v Read/ 3. Check the drive cabling at both ends for loose or
Write Test broken connections or damage to the cable.
v Self-Test Replace the cable if it is damaged.
4. Run the test again.
Messages
and actions 5. For additional troubleshooting information, go to
apply to all http://www.ibm.com/support/
three tests. docview.wss?uid=psg1MIGR-41559.
6. Run the test again.
7. Replace the CD/DVD drive.
8. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

98 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Table 7. DSA Preboot messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3550 M2 Type 7946,” on page 111 to determine which components are customer
replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical information, hints, tips,
and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
215-903-xxx Optical Drive v Verify Aborted Could not 1. Insert a CD/DVD into the drive or try a new
Media access the media, and wait for 15 seconds.
Installed drive.
2. Run the test again.
v Read/ 3. Check the drive cabling at both ends for loose
Write Test or broken connections or damage to the cable.
v Self-Test Replace the cable if it is damaged.
4. Run the test again.
Messages
and actions 5. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
apply to all level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
three tests. http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
6. Run the test again.
7. For additional troubleshooting information, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1MIGR-41559.
8. Run the test again.
9. Replace the CD/DVD drive.
10. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site
for more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
215-904-xxx Optical Drive v Verify Failed A read error 1. Insert a CD/DVD into the drive or try a new
Media occurred. media, and wait for 15 seconds.
Installed 2. Run the test again.
v Read/ 3. Check the drive cabling at both ends for loose or
Write Test broken connections or damage to the cable.
v Self-Test Replace the cable if it is damaged.
4. Run the test again.
Messages
and actions 5. For additional troubleshooting information, go to
apply to all http://www.ibm.com/support/
three tests. docview.wss?uid=psg1MIGR-41559.
6. Run the test again.
7. Replace the CD/DVD drive.
8. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 99
Table 7. DSA Preboot messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3550 M2 Type 7946,” on page 111 to determine which components are customer
replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical information, hints, tips,
and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
217-901-xxx SAS/SATA Disk Drive Failed 1. Reseat all hard disk drive backplane connections
Hard Drive Test at both ends.
2. Reseat the all drives.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the firmware is at the latest level.
5. Run the test again.
6. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
405-901-xxx BroadCom Test Control Failed 1. Make sure that the component firmware is at the
Ethernet Registers latest level. The installed firmware level is shown
Device in the DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD
section for this component. For more
information, see “Updating the firmware” on
page 187.
2. Run the test again.
3. Replace the component that is causing the error.
If the error is caused by an adapter, replace the
adapter. Check the PCI Information and Network
Settings information in the DSA event log to
determine the physical location of the failing
component.
4. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
405-901-xxx BroadCom Test MII Failed 1. Make sure that the component firmware is at the
Ethernet Registers latest level. The installed firmware level is shown
Device in the DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD
section for this component. For more
information, see “Updating the firmware” on
page 187.
2. Run the test again.
3. Replace the component that is causing the error.
If the error is caused by an adapter, replace the
adapter. Check the PCI Information and Network
Settings information in the DSA event log to
determine the physical location of the failing
component.
4. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

100 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Table 7. DSA Preboot messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3550 M2 Type 7946,” on page 111 to determine which components are customer
replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical information, hints, tips,
and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
405-902-xxx BroadCom Test Failed 1. Make sure that the component firmware is at the
Ethernet EEPROM latest level. The installed firmware level is shown
Device in the DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD
section for this component. For more
information, see “Updating the firmware” on
page 187.
2. Run the test again.
3. Replace the component that is causing the error.
If the error is caused by an adapter, replace the
adapter. Check the PCI Information and Network
Settings information in the DSA event log to
determine the physical location of the failing
component.
4. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
405-903-xxx BroadCom Test Internal Failed 1. Make sure that the component firmware is at the
Ethernet Memory latest level. The installed firmware level is shown
Device in the DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD
section for this component. For more
information, see “Updating the firmware” on
page 187.
2. Run the test again.
3. Check the interrupt assignments in the PCI
Hardware section of the DSA event log. If the
Ethernet device is sharing interrupts, if possible,
use the Setup utility see “Using the Setup utility”
on page 191) to assign a unique interrupt to the
device.
4. Replace the component that is causing the error.
If the error is caused by an adapter, replace the
adapter. Check the PCI Information and Network
Settings information in the DSA event log to
determine the physical location of the failing
component.
5. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 101

Table 7. DSA Preboot messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3550 M2 Type 7946,” on page 111 to determine which components are customer
replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical information, hints, tips,
and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
405-904-xxx BroadCom Test Interrupt Failed 1. Make sure that the component firmware is at the
Ethernet latest level. The installed firmware level is shown
Device in the DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD
section for this component. For more
information, see “Updating the firmware” on
page 187.
2. Run the test again.
3. Check the interrupt assignments in the PCI
Hardware section of the DSA event log. If the
Ethernet device is sharing interrupts, if possible,
use the Setup utility see “Using the Setup utility”
on page 191) to assign a unique interrupt to the
device.
4. Replace the component that is causing the error.
If the error is caused by an adapter, replace the
adapter. Check the PCI Information and Network
Settings information in the DSA event log to
determine the physical location of the failing
component.
5. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
405-906-xxx BroadCom Test Loop Failed 1. Check the Ethernet cable for damage and make
Ethernet back at sure that the cable type and connection are
Device Physical correct.
Layer
2. Make sure that the component firmware is at the
latest level. The installed firmware level is shown
in the DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD
section for this component. For more
information, see “Updating the firmware” on
page 187.
3. Run the test again.
4. Replace the component that is causing the error.
If the error is caused by an adapter, replace the
adapter. Check the PCI Information and Network
Settings information in the DSA event log to
determine the physical location of the failing
component.
5. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

102 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Table 7. DSA Preboot messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3550 M2 Type 7946,” on page 111 to determine which components are customer
replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical information, hints, tips,
and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
405-907-xxx BroadCom Test Loop Failed 1. Make sure that the component firmware is at the
Ethernet back at latest level. The installed firmware level is shown
Device MAC-Layer in the DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD
section for this component. For more
information, see “Updating the firmware” on
page 187.
2. Run the test again.
3. Replace the component that is causing the error.
If the error is caused by an adapter, replace the
adapter. Check the PCI Information and Network
Settings information in the DSA event log to
determine the physical location of the failing
component.
4. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
405-908-xxx BroadCom Test LEDs Failed 1. Make sure that the component firmware is at the
Ethernet latest level. The installed firmware level is shown
Device in the DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD
section for this component. For more
information, see “Updating the firmware” on
page 187.
2. Run the test again.
3. Replace the component that is causing the error.
If the error is caused by an adapter, replace the
adapter. Check the PCI Information and Network
Settings information in the DSA event log to
determine the physical location of the failing
component.
4. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 103

Recovering the server firmware
Important: Some cluster solutions require specific code levels or coordinated code
updates. If the device is part of a cluster solution, verify that the latest level of code
is supported for the cluster solution before you update the code.

If the server firmware has become corrupted, such as from a power failure during
an update, you can recover the server firmware in one of two ways:
v In-band method: Recover server firmware, using either the boot block jumper
(Automated Boot Recovery) and a server Firmware Update Package Service
Pack.
v Out-of-band method: Use the IMM Web Interface to update the firmware, using
the latest server firmware update package.

Note: You can obtain a server update package from one of the following sources:
v Download the server firmware update from the World Wide Web.
v Contact your IBM service representative.

To download the server firmware update package from the World Wide Web,
complete the following steps.

Note: Changes are made periodically to the IBM Web site. The actual procedure
might vary slightly from what is described in this document.
1. Go to http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/.
2. Under Product support, click System x.
3. Under Popular links, click Software and device drivers.
4. Click System x3550 M2 to display the matrix of downloadable files for the
server.
5. Download the latest server firmware update.

The flash memory of the server consists of a primary bank and a backup bank. It is
essential that you maintain the backup bank with a bootable firmware image. If the
primary bank becomes corrupted, you can either manually boot the backup bank
with the boot block jumper, or in the case of image corruption, this will occur
automatically with the Automated Boot Recovery function.

In-band manual recovery method

To recover the server firmware and restore the server operation to the primary
bank, complete the following steps:
1. Turn off the server, and disconnect all power cords and external cables.
2. Remove the server cover. See “Removing the cover” on page 122 for more
information.
3. Locate the UEFI boot recovery jumper block (J29) on the system board.

104 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
 4. Move the jumper from pins 1 and 2 to pins 2 and 3 to enable the UEFI
recovery mode.
5. Reinstall the server cover; then, reconnect all power cords.
6. Restart the server. The power-on self-test (POST) starts.
7. Boot the server to an operating system that is supported by the firmware
update package that you downloaded.
8. Perform the firmware update by following the instructions that are in the
firmware update package readme file.
9. Copy the downloaded firmware update package into a directory.
10. From a command line, type filename-s, where filename is the name of the
executable file that you downloaded with the firmware update package.
11. Turn off the server and disconnect all power cords and external cables, and
then remove the server cover.
12. Move the UEFI boot recovery jumper back to the primary position (pins 1 and
2).
13. Reinstall the server cover, and then reconnect all the power cables.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 105

 14. Restart the server.

In-band automated boot recovery method

Note: Use this method if the BRD LED on the light path diagnostics panel is lit and
there is a log entry or Booting Backup Image is displayed on the firmware splash
screen; otherwise, use the in-band manual recovery method.
1. Boot the server to an operating system that is supported by the firmware update
package that you downloaded.
2. Perform the firmware update by following the instructions that are in the
firmware update package readme file.
3. Restart the server.
4. At the firmware splash screen, press F3 when prompted to restore to the
primary bank. The server boots from the primary bank.

Out-of-band method: See the IMM documentation.

Automated boot recovery (ABR)

If the server is booting up and the IMM detect problems with the server firmware in
the primary bank, it will automatically switch to the backup firmware bank and give
you the opportunity to recover the primary bank. To recover to the server firmware
primary bank, complete the following steps.
1. Restart the server.
2. When the prompt press F3 to restore to primary is displayed, press F3 to
recover the primary bank. Pressing F3 will restart the server.

Three boot failure

Configuration changes, such as added devices or adapter firmware updates can
cause the server to fail POST (power-on self-test). If this occurs on three
consecutive boot attempts, the server will temporarily use the default configuration
values and automatically goes to F1 Setup. To solve the problem, complete the
following steps:
1. Undo any configuration changes that you made recently and restart the server.
2. Remove any devices that you added recently and restart the server.
3. If the problem remains, go to Setup and select Load Default Settings, and
then click Save to restore the server factory settings.

System event log

The system event log messages is a combined log that contains messages that
were generated by the IMM. The system event log can contain messages of three
types:
Information
Information messages do not require action; they record significant
system-level events, such as when the server id started.
Warning
Warning messages do not require immediate action; they indicate possible
problems, such as when the recommended maximum ambient temperature
is exceeded.

106 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
 Error Error messages might require action; they indicate system errors, such as
when a fan is not detected.

Each message contains date and time information.

To view the system event log messages, go to http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/

supportsite.wss/docdisplay?lndocid=MIGR-5079340&brandind=5000008

Solving power problems

Power problems can be difficult to solve. For example, a short circuit can exist
anywhere on any of the power distribution buses. Usually, a short circuit will cause
the power subsystem to shut down because of an overcurrent condition. To
diagnose a power problem, use the following general procedure:
1. Turn off the server and disconnect all ac power cords.
2. Check the power-fault LEDs on the system board (see “Power problems” on
page 51).
3. Check for loose cables in the power subsystem. Also check for short circuits, for
example, if a loose screw is causing a short circuit on a circuit board.
4. Remove the adapters and disconnect the cables and power cords to all internal
and external devices until the server is at the minimum configuration that is
required for the server to start (see “Solving undetermined problems” on page
108 for the minimum configuration).
5. Reconnect all ac power cords and turn on the server. If the server starts
successfully, reseat the adapters and devices one at a time until the problem is
isolated.

If the server does not start from the minimum configuration, see “Power-supply
LEDs” on page 64 to replace the components in the minimum configuration one at
a time until the problem is isolated.

Solving Ethernet controller problems

The method that you use to test the Ethernet controller depends on which operating
system you are using. See the operating-system documentation for information
about Ethernet controllers, and see the Ethernet controller device-driver readme file.

Try the following procedures:

v Make sure that the correct device drivers, which come with the server are
installed and that they are at the latest level.
v Make sure that the Ethernet cable is installed correctly.
– The cable must be securely attached at all connections. If the cable is
attached but the problem remains, try a different cable.
– If you set the Ethernet controller to operate at 100 Mbps, you must use
Category 5 cabling.
– If you directly connect two servers (without a hub), or if you are not using a
hub with X ports, use a crossover cable. To determine whether a hub has an
X port, check the port label. If the label contains an X, the hub has an X port.
v Determine whether the hub supports auto-negotiation. If it does not, try
configuring the integrated Ethernet controller manually to match the speed and
duplex mode of the hub.
v Check the Ethernet controller LEDs on the rear panel of the server. These LEDs
indicate whether there is a problem with the connector, cable, or hub.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 107

 – The Ethernet link status LED is lit when the Ethernet controller receives a link
pulse from the hub. If the LED is off, there might be a defective connector or
cable or a problem with the hub.
– The Ethernet transmit/receive activity LED is lit when the Ethernet controller
sends or receives data over the Ethernet network. If the Ethernet
transmit/receive activity is off, make sure that the hub and network are
operating and that the correct device drivers are installed.
v Check the LAN activity LED on the rear of the server. The LAN activity LED is lit
when data is active on the Ethernet network. If the LAN activity LED is off, make
sure that the hub and network are operating and that the correct device drivers
are installed.
v Check for operating-system-specific causes of the problem.
v Make sure that the device drivers on the client and server are using the same
protocol.

If the Ethernet controller still cannot connect to the network but the hardware
appears to be working, the network administrator must investigate other possible
causes of the error.

Solving undetermined problems

If the diagnostic tests did not diagnose the failure or if the server is inoperative, use
the information in this section.

If you suspect that a software problem is causing failures (continuous or

intermittent), see “Software problems” on page 54.

Damaged data in CMOS memory or damaged server firmware can cause

undetermined problems. To reset the CMOS data, use the CMOS jumper to clear
the CMOS memory and override the power-on password; see “System-board
switches and jumpers” on page 18. If you suspect that the server firmware is
damaged, see “Recovering the server firmware” on page 104.

If the power supplies are working correctly, complete the following steps:
1. Turn off the server.
2. Make sure that the server is cabled correctly.
3. Remove or disconnect the following devices, one at a time, until you find the
failure. Turn on the server and reconfigure it each time.
v Any external devices.
v Surge-suppressor device (on the server).
v Printer, mouse, and non-IBM devices.
v Each adapter.
v Hard disk drives.
v Memory modules. The minimum configuration requirement is 1 GB DIMM in
slots 3.
4. Turn on the server.

If the problem is solved when you remove an adapter from the server but the
problem recurs when you reinstall the same adapter, suspect the adapter; if the
problem recurs when you replace the adapter with a different one, suspect the riser
card.

If you suspect a networking problem and the server passes all the system tests,
suspect a network cabling problem that is external to the server.

108 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Problem determination tips
Because of the variety of hardware and software combinations that can encounter,
use the following information to assist you in problem determination. If possible,
have this information available when requesting assistance from IBM.
v Machine type and model
v Microprocessor or hard disk drive upgrades
v Failure symptom
– Does the server fail the diagnostic tests?
– What occurs? When? Where?
– Does the failure occur on a single server or on multiple servers?
– Is the failure repeatable?
– Has this configuration ever worked?
– What changes, if any, were made before the configuration failed?
– Is this the original reported failure?
v Diagnostic program type and version level
v Hardware configuration (print screen of the system summary)
v IMM firmware level
v Operating system software

You can solve some problems by comparing the configuration and software setups
between working and nonworking servers. When you compare servers to each
other for diagnostic purposes, consider them identical only if all the following factors
are exactly the same in all the servers:
v Machine type and model
v IMM firmware level
v Adapters and attachments, in the same locations
v Address jumpers, terminators, and cabling
v Software versions and levels
v Diagnostic program type and version level
v Configuration option settings
v Operating-system control-file setup

See Appendix A, “Getting help and technical assistance,” on page 211 for
information about calling IBM for service.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 109

110 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Chapter 4. Parts listing, System x3550 M2 Type 7946
The following replaceable components are available for the System x3550 M2 Type
7946 server, except as specified otherwise in “Replaceable server components.” To
check for an updated parts listing on the Web, complete the following steps.

Note: Changes are made periodically to the IBM Web site. The actual procedure
might vary slightly from what is described in this document.
1. Go to http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
2. Under Product support, click System x.
3. Under Popular links, select Parts documents lookup.
4. From the Product family menu, select System x3550 M2 and click Go.

Replaceable server components

The four types of replaceable components are:
v Consumables: Purchase and replacement of consumables (components, such
as batteries and printer cartridges, that have depleting life) is your responsibility.
If IBM acquires or installs a consumable component at your request, you will be
charged for the service.
v Tier 1 customer replaceable unit (CRU): Replacement of Tier 1 CRUs is your
responsibility. If IBM installs a Tier 1 CRU at your request, you will be charged for
the installation.
v Tier 2 customer replaceable unit: You may install a Tier 2 CRU yourself or
request IBM to install it, at no additional charge, under the type of warranty
service that is designated for your server.
v Field replaceable unit (FRU): FRUs must be installed only by Trained service
technicians.

For information about the terms of the warranty and getting service and assistance,
see the Warranty and Support Information document on the IBM System x
Documentation CD..

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009 111

 The following illustration shows the major components in the server. The
illustrations in this document might differ slightly from your hardware.

112 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
 The following table lists the part numbers for the server components.
Table 8. Parts listing, Type 7946
CRU part CRU part
number number FRU part
Index Description (Tier 1) (Tier 2) number
1 Top cover (All models) 43V6933
2 DIMM air duct 43V7050
3 PCI-X riser card assembly 43V7068
4 PCI Express riser card, x16, assembly 43V7066
5 Memory, 1 GB PC3-10600R-999 DDR3 ECC 44T1490
5 Memory, 2 GB PC3-10600R-999 DDR3 ECC 44T1491
5 Memory, 2 GB PC3-10600R-999 DDR3 ECC 44T1492
5 Memory, 4 GB PC3-10600R-999 DDR3 ECC 44T1493
5 Memory, 4 GB PC3-10600R-999 DDR3 ECC 46C7452
6 Virtual media key 46C7528
7 Power supply bay filler 49Y4821
8 Power supply, 675 Watt 39Y7201
9 Chassis assembly (without front bezel) 49Y4813
10 CD-RW/DVD drive 44W3255
10 CD-RW/DVD-RW drive 44W3256
10 DVD-ROM drive 44W3254
11 Rack latch kit 49Y4815
12 Bezel 49Y4818
13 Operator information panel assembly 44E4372
14 Hard disk drive, 2.5-inch, hot-swap 73GB 10K 43W7537
14 Hard disk drive, 2.5-inch, hot-swap 73GB 15K 43W7546
14 Hard disk drive, 2.5-inch, hot-swap 146GB 10K 43W7538
15 Filler, hot-swap hard disk drive 44T2248
16 Backplane, SAS hard disk drive 43V7071
17 Fan, hot-swap 40 mm 43V6929
18 System board 43V7072
19 ServeRAID-MR10i adapter 43W4297
20 ServeRAID-BR10i adapter 44E8690
21 SAS/SATA riser card 43V7067
22 Retention module, heat sink 49Y4822
23 Microprocessor, 1.86 GHz, 80W, (models 12x, 12Y, and 46D1272
E1Y)
23 Microprocessor, 2.00 GHz, 80W, (models 22x and 22Y) 46D1271
23 Microprocessor, 2.13 GHz, 60W, 46D1268
23 Microprocessor, 2.13 GHz, 80W, (models 3Ax and 3AY) 46D1270
23 Microprocessor, 2.26 GHz, 60W, (models 42x and 42Y) 46D1269
23 Microprocessor, 2.26 GHz, 80W, (models 32x and 32Y) 46D1267
23 Microprocessor, 2.40 GHz, 80W, (models 52x and 52Y) 46D1266

Chapter 4. Parts listing, System x3550 M2 Type 7946 113

Table 8. Parts listing, Type 7946 (continued)
CRU part CRU part
number number FRU part
Index Description (Tier 1) (Tier 2) number
23 Microprocessor, 2.53 GHz, 80W, (models 62x and 62Y) 46D1265
23 Microprocessor, 2.66 GHz, 95W, (models 72x and 72Y) 46D1264
23 Microprocessor, 2.80 GHz, 95W, (model E3Y) 46D1263
23 Microprocessor, 2.93 GHz, 95W, (model 92x) 46D1262
24 Heat sink assembly 49Y4820
25 Air baffle kit (Microprocessor air baffle, clamp, and DIMM 43V6931
air duct) (all models)
Cable management arm 49Y4817
Cable, hard disk drive configuration 43V7023
Cable, operator panel 46C4139
Cable, SAS power 46C4148
Cable, SAS signal, 120 mm 43V7019
Cable, SAS signal, 200 mm 43V6922
Cable, SATA DVD 43V6914
Cable, USB/video 43V6920
Cable assembly, simple-swap 43V7042
Cover, safety 240VA 49Y4823
DVD drive bay filler 49Y4824
EMC filler 44T2248
Ethernet card 43V7073
Labels, chassis 49Y4812
Labels, system service 49Y4811
Low-profile adapter varies
Miscellaneous parts kit 49Y4814
Riser-card bracket: full-height, half-length 43V6936
Riser-card bracket: low-profile 43V6939
Bracket assembly, rear I/O 43V6938
SAS adapter retainer 49Y4819
ServeRAID-MR10i battery carrier kit 44E8763
Video adapter, NVIDIA FX 1700 43V5765
Video adapter, NVIDIA FX 570 43V5782
Slide rail kit 49Y4816
Thermal grease kit (All models) 41Y9292
Hypervisor, embedded USB flash device 42D0545
Alcohol wipes 59P4739

Consumable parts
Consumable parts are not covered by the IBM Statement of Limited Warranty. The
following consumable parts are available for purchase from the retail store.

114 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Table 9. Consumable parts, Type 7946
Index Description Part number
Battery, 3.0 volt 33F8354
ServeRAID-MR10i battery 43W4342

To order a consumable part, complete the following steps:

1. Go to http://www.ibm.com.
2. From the Products menu, select Upgrades, accessories & parts.
3. Click Obtain maintenance parts; then, follow the instructions to order the part
from the retail store.

If you need help with your order, call the toll-free number that is listed on the retail
parts page, or contact your local IBM representative for assistance.

Chapter 4. Parts listing, System x3550 M2 Type 7946 115

Power cords
For your safety, IBM provides a power cord with a grounded attachment plug to use
with this IBM product. To avoid electrical shock, always use the power cord and
plug with a properly grounded outlet.

IBM power cords used in the United States and Canada are listed by Underwriter’s
Laboratories (UL) and certified by the Canadian Standards Association (CSA).

For units intended to be operated at 115 volts: Use a UL-listed and CSA-certified
cord set consisting of a minimum 18 AWG, Type SVT or SJT, three-conductor cord,
a maximum of 15 feet in length and a parallel blade, grounding-type attachment
plug rated 15 amperes, 125 volts.

For units intended to be operated at 230 volts (U.S.): Use a UL-listed and
CSA-certified cord set consisting of a minimum 18 AWG, Type SVT or SJT,
three-conductor cord, a maximum of 15 feet in length and a tandem blade,
grounding-type attachment plug rated 15 amperes, 250 volts.

For units intended to be operated at 230 volts (outside the U.S.): Use a cord set
with a grounding-type attachment plug. The cord set should have the appropriate
safety approvals for the country in which the equipment will be installed.

IBM power cords for a specific country or region are usually available only in that
country or region.

IBM power cord part

number Used in these countries and regions
39M5206 China
39M5102 Australia, Fiji, Kiribati, Nauru, New Zealand, Papua New Guinea
39M5123 Afghanistan, Albania, Algeria, Andorra, Angola, Armenia, Austria,
Azerbaijan, Belarus, Belgium, Benin, Bosnia and Herzegovina,
Bulgaria, Burkina Faso, Burundi, Cambodia, Cameroon, Cape
Verde, Central African Republic, Chad, Comoros, Congo
(Democratic Republic of), Congo (Republic of), Cote D’Ivoire
(Ivory Coast), Croatia (Republic of), Czech Republic, Dahomey,
Djibouti, Egypt, Equatorial Guinea, Eritrea, Estonia, Ethiopia,
Finland, France, French Guyana, French Polynesia, Germany,
Greece, Guadeloupe, Guinea, Guinea Bissau, Hungary, Iceland,
Indonesia, Iran, Kazakhstan, Kyrgyzstan, Laos (People’s
Democratic Republic of), Latvia, Lebanon, Lithuania, Luxembourg,
Macedonia (former Yugoslav Republic of), Madagascar, Mali,
Martinique, Mauritania, Mauritius, Mayotte, Moldova (Republic of),
Monaco, Mongolia, Morocco, Mozambique, Netherlands, New
Caledonia, Niger, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Reunion, Romania,
Russian Federation, Rwanda, Sao Tome and Principe, Saudi
Arabia, Senegal, Serbia, Slovakia, Slovenia (Republic of),
Somalia, Spain, Suriname, Sweden, Syrian Arab Republic,
Tajikistan, Tahiti, Togo, Tunisia, Turkey, Turkmenistan, Ukraine,
Upper Volta, Uzbekistan, Vanuatu, Vietnam, Wallis and Futuna,
Yugoslavia (Federal Republic of), Zaire
39M5130 Denmark
39M5144 Bangladesh, Lesotho, Macao, Maldives, Namibia, Nepal,
Pakistan, Samoa, South Africa, Sri Lanka, Swaziland, Uganda

116 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
IBM power cord part
number Used in these countries and regions
39M5151 Abu Dhabi, Bahrain, Botswana, Brunei Darussalam, Channel
Islands, China (Hong Kong S.A.R.), Cyprus, Dominica, Gambia,
Ghana, Grenada, Iraq, Ireland, Jordan, Kenya, Kuwait, Liberia,
Malawi, Malaysia, Malta, Myanmar (Burma), Nigeria, Oman,
Polynesia, Qatar, Saint Kitts and Nevis, Saint Lucia, Saint Vincent
and the Grenadines, Seychelles, Sierra Leone, Singapore, Sudan,
Tanzania (United Republic of), Trinidad and Tobago, United Arab
Emirates (Dubai), United Kingdom, Yemen, Zambia, Zimbabwe
39M5158 Liechtenstein, Switzerland
39M5165 Chile, Italy, Libyan Arab Jamahiriya
39M5172 Israel
39M5095 220 - 240 V

Antigua and Barbuda, Aruba, Bahamas, Barbados, Belize,

Bermuda, Bolivia, Caicos Islands, Canada, Cayman Islands,
Colombia, Costa Rica, Cuba, Dominican Republic, Ecuador, El
Salvador, Guam, Guatemala, Haiti, Honduras, Jamaica, Mexico,
Micronesia (Federal States of), Netherlands Antilles, Nicaragua,
Panama, Peru, Philippines, Saudi Arabia, Thailand, Taiwan,
United States of America, Venezuela
39M5081 110 - 120 V

Antigua and Barbuda, Aruba, Bahamas, Barbados, Belize,

Bermuda, Bolivia, Caicos Islands, Canada, Cayman Islands,
Colombia, Costa Rica, Cuba, Dominican Republic, Ecuador, El
Salvador, Guam, Guatemala, Haiti, Honduras, Jamaica, Mexico,
Micronesia (Federal States of), Netherlands Antilles, Nicaragua,
Panama, Peru, Philippines, Saudi Arabia, Thailand, Taiwan,
United States of America, Venezuela
39M5219 Korea (Democratic People’s Republic of), Korea (Republic of)
39M5199 Japan
39M5068 Argentina, Paraguay, Uruguay
39M5226 India
39M5233 Brazil

Chapter 4. Parts listing, System x3550 M2 Type 7946 117

118 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Chapter 4. Removing and replacing server components
Replaceable components are of three types:
v Tier 1 customer replaceable unit (CRU): Replacement of Tier 1 CRUs is your
responsibility. If IBM installs a Tier 1 CRU at your request, you will be charged for
the installation.
v Tier 2 customer replaceable unit: You may install a Tier 2 CRU yourself or
request IBM to install it, at no additional charge, under the type of warranty
service that is designated for your server.
v Field replaceable unit (FRU): FRUs must be installed only by Trained service
technicians.

See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3550 M2 Type 7946,” on page 111 to
determine whether a component is a Tier 1 CRU, Tier 2 CRU, or FRU.

For information about the terms of the warranty and getting service and assistance,
see the Warranty and Support Information document.

Installation guidelines
Before you remove or replace a component, read the following information:
v Read the safety information that begins on page vii and the guidelines in
“Working inside the server with the power on” on page 121 and “Handling
static-sensitive devices” on page 121. This information will help you work safely.
v When you install your new server, take the opportunity to download and apply
the most recent firmware updates. This step will help to ensure that any known
issues are addressed and that your server is ready to function at maximum levels
of performance. To download firmware updates for your server, complete the
following steps:
1. Go to http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/.
2. Under Product support, click System x.
3. Under Popular links, click Software and device drivers.
4. Click System x3550 M2 to display the matrix of downloadable files for the
server.
For additional information about tools for updating, managing, and deploying
firmware, see the System x and xSeries Tools Center at http://
publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/toolsctr/v1r0/index.jsp.
v Before you install optional devices, make sure that the server is working
correctly. Start the server, and make sure that the operating system starts, if an
operating system is installed, or that a 19990305 error code is displayed,
indicating that an operating system was not found but the server is otherwise
working correctly. If the server is not working correctly, see Chapter 1, “Start
here,” on page 1 and Chapter 3, “Diagnostics,” on page 23 for diagnostic
information.
v Observe good housekeeping in the area where you are working. Place removed
covers and other parts in a safe place.
v If you must start the server while the cover is removed, make sure that no one is
near the server and that no other objects have been left inside the server.
v Do not attempt to lift an object that you think is too heavy for you. If you have to
lift a heavy object, observe the following precautions:
– Make sure that you stand safely without slipping.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009 119

 – Distribute the weight of the object equally between your feet.
– Use a slow lifting force. Never move suddenly or twist when you lift a heavy
object.
– To avoid straining the muscles in your back, lift by standing or by pushing up
with your leg muscles
v Make sure that you have an adequate number of properly grounded electrical
outlets for the server, monitor, and other devices.
v Back up all important data before you make changes to disk drives.
v Have a small flat-blade screwdriver, a small Phillips screwdriver, and a T8 torx
screwdriver available.
v You do not have to turn off the server to install or replace hot-swap power
supplies, hot-swap fans, hot-swap drives, or hot-plug Universal Serial Bus (USB)
devices. However, you must turn off the server before you perform any steps that
involve removing or installing adapter cables, and you must disconnect the power
source before you perform any steps that involve removing or installing riser
cards.
v Blue on a component indicates touch points, where you can grip the component
to remove it from or install it in the server, open or close a latch, and so on.
v Orange on a component or an orange label on or near a component indicates
that the component can be hot-swapped, which means that if the server and
operating system support hot-swap capability, you can remove or install the
component while the server is running. (Orange can also indicate touch points on
hot-swap components.) See the instructions for removing or installing a specific
hot-swap component for any additional procedures that you might have to
perform before you remove or install the component.
v When you are finished working on the server, reinstall all safety shields, guards,
labels, and ground wires.
v For a list of supported optional devices for the server, see http://www.ibm.com/
servers/eserver/serverproven/compat/us/.

System reliability guidelines

To help ensure proper cooling and system reliability, make sure that the following
requirements are met:
v Each of the drive bays has a drive or a filler panel and electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC) shield installed in it.
v There is adequate space around the server to allow the server cooling system to
work properly. Leave approximately 50 mm (2 in.) of open space around the front
and rear of the server. Do not place objects in front of the fans. For proper
cooling and airflow, replace the server cover before you turn on the server.
Operating the server for extended periods of time (more than 30 minutes) with
the server cover removed might damage server components.
v You have followed the cabling instructions that come with optional adapters.
v You have replaced a failed fan within 48 hours.
v You have replaced a hot-swap fan within 30 seconds of removal.
v You have kept the preinstalled air deflector in place unless directed to remove it
in this publication or by IBM Service. See “Removing the microprocessor 2 air
baffle” on page 123 for the location of the air deflector in the server.

120 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Working inside the server with the power on
Attention: Static electricity that is released to internal server components when
the server is powered-on might cause the server to halt, which might result in the
loss of data. To avoid this potential problem, always use an electrostatic-discharge
wrist strap or other grounding system when you work inside the server with the
power on.

You might have to have the server turned on while the cover is off, to look at light
path diagnostics LEDs or replace hot swap components. Follow these guidelines
when you work inside a server that is turned on:
v Avoid wearing loose-fitting clothing on your forearms. Button long-sleeved shirts
before working inside the server; do not wear cuff links while you are working
inside the server.
v Do not allow your necktie or scarf to hang inside the server.
v Remove jewelry, such as bracelets, necklaces, rings, and loose-fitting wrist
watches.
v Remove items from your shirt pocket, such as pens and pencils, that could fall
into the server as you lean over it.
v Avoid dropping any metallic objects, such as paper clips, hairpins, and screws,
into the server.

Handling static-sensitive devices

Attention: Static electricity can damage the server and other electronic devices.
To avoid damage, keep static-sensitive devices in their static-protective packages
until you are ready to install them.

To reduce the possibility of damage from electrostatic discharge, observe the

following precautions:
v Limit your movement. Movement can cause static electricity to build up around
you.
v The use of a grounding system is recommended. For example, wear an
electrostatic-discharge wrist strap, if one is available. Always use an
electrostatic-discharge wrist strap or other grounding system when working inside
the server with the power on.
v Handle the device carefully, holding it by its edges or its frame.
v Do not touch solder joints, pins, or exposed circuitry.
v Do not leave the device where others can handle and damage it.
v While the device is still in its static-protective package, touch it to an unpainted
metal part on the outside of the server for at least 2 seconds. This drains static
electricity from the package and from your body.
v Remove the device from its package and install it directly into the server without
setting down the device. If it is necessary to set down the device, put it back into
its static-protective package. Do not place the device on the server cover or on a
metal surface.
v Take additional care when handling devices during cold weather. Heating reduces
indoor humidity and increases static electricity.

Returning a device or component

If you are instructed to return a device or component, follow all packaging
instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to you.

Chapter 4. Removing and replacing server components 121

Removing and replacing consumable parts and Tier 1 CRUs
Replacement of consumable parts and Tier 1 CRUs is your responsibility. If IBM
installs a consumable part or Tier 1 CRU at your request, you will be charged for
the installation.

The illustrations in this document might differ slightly from your hardware.

Removing the cover

To remove the server cover, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”
on page 119.
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices and disconnect the power cords and
all external cables, if necessary.

Note: When you disconnect the power source from the server, you lose the
ability to view the LEDs because the LEDs are not lit when the power source is
removed. Before you disconnect the power source, make a note of which LEDs
are lit, including the LEDs that are lit on the operation information panel, on the
light path diagnostics panel, and LEDs inside the server on the system board;
then, see “Light path diagnostics LEDs” on page 58 for information on how to
solve the problem.

3. If the server has been installed in a rack, slide the server out from the rack
enclosure.
4. Press down firmly on the blue tab on the top (near the front of the server) of the
cover and slide the cover toward the rear of the server until the cover has
disengaged from the chassis.
5. Lift the server cover off the server and set it aside.

Attention: For proper cooling and airflow, replace the server cover before you
turn on the server.

Installing the cover

To install the server cover, complete the following steps:
1. Make sure that all cables, adapters, and other components are installed and
seated correctly and that you have not left loose tools or parts inside the server.
Also, make sure that all internal cables are correctly routed.

122 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
 Important: Before you slide the cover forward, make sure that all the tabs on
both the front, rear, and side of the cover engage the chassis correctly. If all the
tabs do not engage the chassis correctly, it will be very difficult to remove the
cover later.
2. Position the cover on top of the server.
3. Slide the cover toward the front of the server.
4. Make sure that the cover correctly engages all the inset tabs on the server.
5. Slide the server all the way into the rack until it latches.

6. Reconnect the external cables and power cords.

Removing the microprocessor 2 air baffle

To remove the microprocessor 2 air baffle, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”
on page 119.
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices and disconnect the power cords and
all external cables (see “Turning off the server” on page 14).
3. Lift the air baffle up, making sure that the tab comes out of the hole on the side
of the power-supply cage; then, remove the air baffle from the server and set it
aside.
Attention: For proper cooling and airflow, replace the air baffle before you
turn on the server. Operating the server with the air baffle removed might
damage server components.

Chapter 4. Removing and replacing server components 123

Installing the microprocessor 2 air baffle
To install the air baffle, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”
on page 119.
2. Align the microprocessor 2 air baffle tab with the hole on the side of the
power-supply cage; then insert the tab into the hole on the cage (make sure
that the front end of the air baffle is lined up with the blue touch point tab on the
left side of fan 6). Press the air baffle down until the it is securely seated.
3. Install the cover (see “Installing the cover” on page 122).
4. Slide the server into the rack.
5. Reconnect the power cords and any cables that you removed.
6. Turn on the peripheral devices and the server.

Removing the DIMM air baffle

To remove the DIMM air baffle, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”
on page 119.
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices and disconnect all power cords and
external cables if necessary. Remove the server cover (see “Removing the
cover” on page 122).
3. Grasp the DIMM air baffle and lift the baffle up, making sure that the pin comes
out of the pin hole on the system board to the left of DIMM connector 8.

124 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
 4. Remove it from the server and set it aside.
Attention: For proper cooling and airflow, replace the air baffle before you
turn on the server. Operating the server with an air baffle removed might
damage server components.

Installing the DIMM air baffle

To install the DIMM air baffle, complete the following steps:
1. Align the DIMM air baffle over the DIMMs so that the baffle pin on the left side
of the air baffle aligns with the pin hole next to DIMM connector 8 on the system
board, and lower it into the server.

2. Install the cover.

3. Slide the server into the rack.
4. Reconnect the power cord and any cables that you removed.

Chapter 4. Removing and replacing server components 125

 5. Turn on the peripheral devices and the server.
Attention: For proper cooling and airflow, replace the air baffle before turning
on the server. Operating the server with an air baffle removed might damage
server components.

Removing an adapter
To remove an adapter, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”
on page 119.
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices and disconnect all power cords; then,
remove the cover (see “Removing the cover” on page 122).
3. Disconnect any cables from the adapter.
4. Grasp the riser-card assembly at the rear edge and lift to remove the riser-card
assembly.
5. Place the riser-card assembly on a flat, static-protective surface.
6. Carefully grasp the adapter by its top edge or upper corners, and pull the
adapter from the riser-card assembly.

7. If you are instructed to return the adapter, follow all packaging instructions, and
use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to you.

126 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Installing an adapter
The following notes describe the types of adapters that the server supports and
other information that you must consider when you install an adapter:
v Locate the documentation that comes with the adapter and follow those
instructions in addition to the instructions in this section.
v The server provides one SAS/SATA RAID riser-card slot on the system board.
See “System-board optional device connectors” on page 21 for the location of the
SAS/SATA RAID riser-card slot. You can replace the IBM ServeRAID-BR10i
SAS/SATA adapter with the optional IBM ServeRAID-MR10i SAS/SATA adapter in
the slot. The ServeRAID-BR10i adapter comes installed on standard models of
the server and supports RAID levels 0, 1, and 1E. The optional
ServeRAID-MR10i adapter can be purchased and supports RAID levels 0, 1, 5,
6, 10, 50, and 60. For configuration information, see the ServeRAID
documentation at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/.
Important: To ensure that any of your ServeRAID 10i, 10is, or 10M adapters
function properly on UEFI-based servers, make sure that the adapter firmware
level is updated to at least 11.x.x-XXX , and the supporting drivers.
Attention: Some cluster solutions require specific code levels or coordinated
code updates. If the device is part of a cluster solution, verify that the latest level
of code is supported for the cluster solution before you update the code.
v Do not set the maximum digital video adapter resolution above 1600 x 1200 at
60 Hz for an LCD monitor. This is the highest resolution that is supported for any
add-on video adapter that you install in the server.
v Any high-definition video-out connector or stereo connector on any add-on video
adapter is not supported
v The server does not support full-length, full-height PCI-X adapters or legacy 5 V
PCI adapters.
v When you install any PCI adapter, the power cords must be disconnected from
the power source before you remove the PCI Express riser-card assembly and
the PCI-X riser-card assembly. Otherwise, the active power management event
signal will be disabled by the system-board logic, and the Wake on LAN feature
might not work. However, after the server is powered-on locally, the active power
manager active power management event signal will be enabled by the
system-board logic.
v If you switch the PCI adapter from slot 1 riser assembly to slot 2, you will need to
remove the screw from the standard bracket and then replace the standard
bracket with the low-profile bracket.
v The server provides two PCI riser-card slots on the system board. Each slot
comes with a PCI riser-card assembly with a bracket installed. The following
information indicates the riser-card slots and the type of adapters that the riser
cards support:
– Standard models of the server come with two PCI Express riser-card
assemblies installed. If you want to replace them with PCI-X riser-card
assemblies, you must order the PCI-X riser-card assembly option, which
includes the bracket.
– A PCI Express riser-card assembly has a black connector and supports PCI
Express adapters, and a PCI-X riser-card assembly has a white (light in color)
connector and supports PCI-X adapters.
– PCI riser slot 1 (the farthest slot from the power supplies). This slot supports
only low-profile adapters.
– PCI riser slot 2 (the closest slot to the power supplies). This slot supports only
full-height, half-length adapters.

Chapter 4. Removing and replacing server components 127

 The following table lists the supported configurations for the PCI rise-cardr slots.
Table 10. PCI riser slots supported configurations
PCI riser-card
slot number Configuration 1 Configuration 2 Configuration 3 Configuration 4
Slot 1 PCI Express PCI Express PCI-X 1.0a PCI-X 1.0a
Gen 2 (x16) card Gen 2 (x16) card 64-bit/133 MHz 64-bit/133 MHz
with a PCI with a PCI care with a card with a
Express Express PCI-X riser-card PCI-X riser-card
riser-card with a riser-card with a with a low-profile with a low-profile
low-profile low-profile bracket bracket
bracket bracket
Slot 2 PCI Express PCI-X 1.0a PCI Express PCI-X 1.0a
Gen 2 (x16) card 64-bit/133 MHz Gen 2 (x16) card 64-bit/133 MHz
with a PCI card with a with a PCI card with a
Express PCI-X riser-card Express PCI-X riser-card
riser-card with a with a standard riser-card with a with a standard
standard bracket bracket standard bracket bracket

To install an adapter, complete the following steps:

Notes:
1. The instructions in this section apply to any PCI adapter (for example, video
graphics adapters or network adapters).
2. Do not set the maximum digital video adapter resolution above 1600 x 1200 at
60 Hz for an LCD monitor. This is the highest resolution that is supported for
any add-on video adapter that you install in the server.
3. Any high-definition video-out connector or stereo connector on any add-on video
adapter is not supported
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and the “Installation
guidelines” on page 119.
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices and disconnect the power cords and
all external cables; then, remove the server cover (see “Removing the cover”
on page 122).
Attention: When you install an adapter, make sure that the adapter is
correctly seated in the riser-card assembly and that the riser-card assembly is
securely seated in the riser-card connector on the system board before you
turn on the server. An incorrectly seated adapter might cause damage to the
system board, the riser-card assembly, or the adapter.
3. Follow the cabling instructions, if any come with the adapter. Route the adapter
cables before you install the adapter.
4. Insert the adapter into the riser-card assembly, aligning the edge connector on
the adapter with the connector on the riser-card assembly. Press the edge of
the connector firmly into the riser-card assembly. Make sure that the adapter
snaps into the riser-card assembly securely.

128 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
 Attention: When you install an adapter, make sure that the adapter is
correctly seated in the riser-card assembly and that the riser-card assembly is
securely seated in the riser-card connector on the system board before you
turn on the server. An incorrectly seated adapter might cause damage to the
system board, the riser-card assembly, or the adapter.
5. Install the riser-card assembly in the server (see “Installing a PCI riser-card
assembly” on page 171).
6. Perform any configuration tasks that are required for the adapter.
7. Install the cover (see “Installing the cover” on page 122).
8. Slide the server into the rack.
9. Reconnect the power cord and any cables that you removed.
10. Turn on the peripheral devices and the server.

Removing the SAS/SATA RAID riser-card assembly

To remove the SAS/SATA RAID riser-card assembly, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”
on page 119.
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices and disconnect all power cords; then,
remove the cover (see “Removing the cover” on page 122).
3. Disconnect the cables from the connectors on the SAS/SATA adapter; then,
grasp the adapter and pull it out of the connector on the RAID riser-card
assembly.
4. Press the plastic tab (next to the power supply) toward the power supply and
remove the entire SAS/SATA RAID riser-card assembly; then, remove the
adapter.
5. Remove the flash device from the SAS/SATA RAID riser card, if one is installed
(see “Removing a USB embedded hypervisor flash device” on page 150).

Chapter 4. Removing and replacing server components 129

 6. If you are instructed to return the RAID riser-card assembly, follow all packaging
instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to
you.

Installing the SAS/SATA RAID riser-card assembly

To install the SAS/SATA RAID riser-card assembly, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and the “Installation
guidelines” on page 119.
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices and disconnect the power cords and
all external cables; then, remove the server cover (see “Removing the cover”
on page 122).
3. Reinstall the SAS/SATA adapter, if one was removed. See “Installing an IBM
ServeRAID-BR10i SAS/SATA Controller” on page 145 or “Installing an optional
IBM ServeRAID-MR10i SAS/SATA Controller” on page 148 for information
about installing the controller.
4. Reinstall the flash device, if it was removed (see “Installing a USB embedded
hypervisor flash device” on page 151).
5. Align the SAS/SATA RAID riser-card assembly keys correctly with the
connector on the system board and press down on the assembly until it is
seated firmly into the connector on the system board.
6. Connect the signal cables to the SAS/SATA adapter. See “Installing an IBM
ServeRAID-BR10i SAS/SATA Controller” on page 145 or “Installing an optional
IBM ServeRAID-MR10i SAS/SATA Controller” on page 148 for information
about cabling the adapter.

130 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
 7. Install the cover (see “Installing the cover” on page 122).
8. Slide the server into the rack.
9. Reconnect the power cord and any cables that you removed.
10. Turn on the peripheral devices and the server.

Removing a hot-swap hard disk drive

To remove a hot-swap hard disk drive, complete the following steps.

Attention:
v To avoid damage to the hard disk drive connectors, make sure that the server
cover is in place and fully closed whenever you install or remove a hard disk
drive.
v To make sure that there is adequate system cooling, do not operate the server
for more than 2 minutes without either a hard disk drive or a filler panel installed
in each bay.

Chapter 4. Removing and replacing server components 131

 1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”
on page 119.
2. Slide the release latch (orange) gently to the left to unlock the drive handle.
3. Grasp the handle and slide the drive out of the drive bay.
4. If you are instructed to return the drive assembly, follow all packaging
instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to
you.

Installing a hot-swap hard disk drive

The following notes describe the type of hard disk drives that the server supports
and other information that you must consider when you install a hard disk drive. For
a list of supported hard disk drives, see http://www.ibm.com/servers/eserver/
serverproven/compat/us/.
v Locate the documentation that comes with the hard disk drive and follow those
instructions in addition to the instructions in this chapter.
v Make sure that you have all the cables and other equipment that are specified in
the documentation that comes with the drive.
v Select the bay in which you want to install the drive.
v Check the instructions that come with the drive to determine whether you have to
set any switches or jumpers on the drive. If you are installing a SAS or SATA
device, be sure to set the SAS or SATA ID for that device.
v The server supports six 2.5-inch hot-swap SAS or hot-swap SATA hard disk
drives.
v You can mix SAS and SATA hard disk drives in the same server as long as they
are not on the same array.
v The electromagnetic interference (EMI) integrity and cooling of the server are
protected by having all bays and PCI and PCI Express slots covered or
occupied. When you install a drive, PCI, or PCI Express adapter, save the EMC
shield and filler panel from the bay or PCI or PCI Express adapter slot cover in
the event that you later remove the device.
v For a complete list of supported optional devices for the server, see
http://www.ibm.com/servers/eserver/serverproven/compat/us/.

To install a 2.5-inch hot-swap SAS or SATA hard disk drive, complete the following
steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”
on page 119.
2. Remove the filler panel from the empty drive bay.
3. Touch the static-protective package that contains the drive to any unpainted
metal surface on the server; then, remove the drive from the package and place
it on a static-protective surface.

132 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
 4. Install the hard disk drive in the drive bay:
a. Make sure that the tray handle is in the open (unlocked) position.
b. Align the drive assembly with the guide rails in the bay.

c. Gently push the drive assembly into the bay until the drive stops.
d. Rotate the tray handle to the closed (locked) position.
e. Check the hard disk drive status LED to verify that the hard disk drive is
operating correctly. If the amber hard disk drive status LED for a drive is lit
continuously, that drive is faulty and must be replaced. If the green hard disk
drive activity LED is flashing, the drive is being accessed.

Note: If the server is configured for RAID operation using a ServeRAID

adapter, you might have to reconfigure your disk arrays after you install hard
disk drives. See the ServeRAID adapter documentation for additional
information about RAID operation and complete instructions for using the
ServeRAID adapter.
5. If you are installing additional hot-swap hard disk drives, do so now.
6. Turn on the peripheral devices and the server.

IDs for hot-swap hard disk drives

The hot-swap-drive ID that is assigned to each drive is printed on the front of the
server. The following illustration shows the location of the IDs of the hard disk
drives. The ID numbers and the drive bay numbers are the same.

Removing a CD/DVD drive

To remove a CD/DVD drive, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page “Safety” on page vii and
“Installation guidelines” on page 119.
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices and disconnect all power cords.
3. Remove the server cover (see “Removing the cover” on page 122).

Chapter 4. Removing and replacing server components 133

 4. Press and hold the release tab down as you push the drive from the rear to
slide it out of the bay.

5. Slide the drive-retention clip from the side of the drive. Save the clip to use
when you install the replacement drive.

6. If you are instructed to return the CD/DVD drive, follow all packaging
instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to
you.

Installing a CD/DVD drive

The following notes describe the type of drives that the server supports and other
information that you must consider when you install a hard disk drive. For a list of
supported drives, see http://www.ibm.com/servers/eserver/serverproven/compat/us/.
v Locate the documentation that comes with the drive and follow those instructions
in addition to the instructions in this chapter.
v Make sure that you have all the cables and other equipment that are specified in
the documentation that comes with the drive.
v The server supports one ultra-slim SATA optical drive. The server comes
standard with a CD/DVD-ROM installed.

If you need to replace a CD/DVD drive, complete the following steps:

1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”
on page 119.
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices and disconnect the power cords and
all external cables.

134 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
3. Remove the cover (see “Removing the cover” on page 122).
4. Disconnect the drive cable from the system board.
5. Locate the blue release tab on the rear of the drive; then, while you press the
tab, push the drive toward the front of the server.

6. Install the retention clip to the side of the drive.

Note: If you are installing a drive that contains a laser, observe the following
safety precaution.
Statement 3:

Chapter 4. Removing and replacing server components 135

 CAUTION:
When laser products (such as CD-ROMs, DVD drives, fiber optic devices,
or transmitters) are installed, note the following:
v Do not remove the covers. Removing the covers of the laser product
could result in exposure to hazardous laser radiation. There are no
serviceable parts inside the device.
v Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other
than those specified herein might result in hazardous radiation
exposure.

DANGER
Some laser products contain an embedded Class 3A or Class 3B laser
diode. Note the following.

Laser radiation when open. Do not stare into the beam, do not view
directly with optical instruments, and avoid direct exposure to the
beam.

Class 1 Laser Product

Laser Klasse 1
Laser Klass 1
Luokan 1 Laserlaite
Appareil A` Laser de Classe 1

7. Slide the drive through the front of the server.

8. Touch the static-protective package that contains the new optical drive to any
unpainted metal surface on the server; then, remove the drive from the
package and place it on a static-protective surface.
9. Follow the instructions that come with the drive to set any jumpers or switches.
10. Attach the drive retention clip that you removed from the previous drive to the
side of the new drive.
11. Align the drive in the drive bay and slide the drive into the CD/DVD drive bay
until the drive clicks into place.
12. Connect the drive cable to the system board.
The following illustration shows the cable routing for the CD/DVD drive:

Note: The CD/DVD cable should go on the top of the operation information
panel cable (in the middle) and the Video/USB cable (on the bottom) when all
three cables are installed in the server.
13. Reconnect the power cord and any cables that you removed.
14. Turn on the peripheral devices and the server.

Removing the CD/DVD cable

To remove the CD/DVD cable, complete the following steps:

136 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
 1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”
on page 119.
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices and disconnect all power cords.
3. Remove the cover (see “Removing the cover” on page 122).
4. Remove the fans in fan connectors 2, 3, and 4 (see “Removing a hot-swap fan
assembly” on page 155).
5. Remove the CD/DVD drive (see “Removing a CD/DVD drive” on page 133).
6. From the front of the server, grasp the cable connector latch and slide it up
toward the fan bracket; then, press the spring latch (right of the cable
connector) and slide the cable connector to the right.
Spring latch
on CD/DVD
drive cage
Cable
connector
latch

7. Remove the cable from the optical drive cage connector and set it aside.
8. If you are instructed to return the CD/DVD drive, follow all packaging
instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to
you.

Installing the CD/DVD cable

To install the CD/DVD cable, complete the following cable:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”
on page 119.
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices and disconnect the power cords and
all external cables.
3. Align the cable connector with the connector on the rear of the optical drive
cage and press the cable connector into the optical drive cage connector until
it is firmly seated.
4. Pull the cable connector latch up and hold it there while you slide the cable
connector to the left; then, slide the cable connector latch down to lock the
cable in place.

Chapter 4. Removing and replacing server components 137

 The following shows cable routing for the CD/DVD cable:

Note: The CD/DVD cable should be routed over the top of the operation
information panel cable (in the middle) and the USB/Video cable (on the
bottom) when all three cables are installed in the server.
5. Reinstall the CD/DVD drive (see “Installing a CD/DVD drive” on page 134).
6. Reinstall the fans (see “Installing a hot-swap fan assembly” on page 157).
7. Replace the cover (see “Installing the cover” on page 122).
8. Slide the server into the rack.
9. Reconnect the power cord and any cables that you removed.
10. Turn on the peripheral devices and the server.
138 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Removing a memory module
To remove a dual inline memory module (DIMM), complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”
on page 119.
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices and disconnect all power cords.
3. Remove the cover (see “Removing the cover” on page 122).
4. Remove the DIMM air baffle (see “Removing the DIMM air baffle” on page 124).
5. Carefully open the retaining clips on each end of the DIMM connector and
remove the DIMM.
Attention: To avoid breaking the retaining clips or damaging the DIMM
connectors, open and close the clips gently.

6. If you are instructed to return the DIMM, follow all packaging instructions, and
use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to you.

Installing a memory module

The following notes describe the types of DIMMs that the server supports and other
information that you must consider when you install DIMMs (see “System-board
optional device connectors” on page 21 for the location of the DIMM connectors):
v The server supports only industry-standard double-data-rate 3 (DDR3), 800,
1066, or 1333 MHz, PC3-10600R-999 (single-rank or dual-rank), registered,
synchronous dynamic random-access memory (SDRAM) dual inline memory
modules (DIMMs) with error correcting code (ECC). See http://www.ibm.com/
servers/eserver/serverproven/compat/us/ for a list of supported memory modules
for the server.
– The specifications of a DDR3 DIMM are on a label on the DIMM, in the
following format.
ggg eRxff-PC3-wwwwwm-aa-bb-cc
where:
ggg is the total capacity of the DIMM (for example, 1GB, 2GB, or 4GB)
e is the number of ranks
1 = single-rank
2 = dual-rank
4 = quad-rank

Chapter 4. Removing and replacing server components 139

 ff is the device organization (bit width)
4 = x4 organization (4 DQ lines per SDRAM)
8 = x8 organization
16 = x16 organization
wwwww is the DIMM bandwidth, in MBps
6400 = 6.40 GBps (PC3-800 SDRAMs, 8-byte primary data bus)
8500 = 8.53 GBps (PC3-1066 SDRAMs, 8-byte primary data bus)
10600 = 10.66 GBps (PC3-1333 SDRAMs, 8-byte primary data bus)
12800 = 12.80 GBps PC3-1600 SDRAMs, 8-byte primary data bus)
m is the DIMM type
E = Unbuffered DIMM (UDIMM) with ECC (x72-bit module data bus)
R = Registered DIMM (RDIMM)
U = Unbuffered DIMM with no ECC (x64-bit primary data bus)
aa is the CAS latency, in clocks at maximum operating frequency
bb is the JEDEC SPD Revision Encoding and Additions level
cc is the reference design file for the design of the DIMM
d is the revision number of the reference design of the DIMM
v The server supports a maximum of 16 single-rank or dual-rank DIMMs.

Note: To determine the type of a DIMM, see the label on the DIMM. The
information on the label is in the format xxxxx nRxxx PC3-xxxxx-xx-xx-xxx. The
numeral in the sixth numerical position indicates whether the DIMM is single-rank
(n=1) or dual-rank (n=2).
v The server supports three single-rank or dual-rank DIMMs per channel. The
following table shows an example of the maximum amount of memory that you
can install using ranked DIMMs:
Table 11. Maximum memory installation using ranked DIMMs
Number of DIMMs DIMM type DIMM size Total memory
16 Single-rank DIMMs 4 GB 64 GB
16 Dual-rank DIMMs 4 GB 64 GB
16 Dual-rank DIMMs 8 GB (if available) 128 GB

v The DIMM options that are available for the server are 1 GB, 2 GB, 4 GB, and 8
GB (when available). The sever supports a minimum of 1 GB and a maximum of
128 GB of system memory.

Note: The amount of usable memory is reduced depending on the system

configuration. A certain amount of memory must be reserved for system
resources. To view the total amount of installed memory and the amount of
configured memory, run the Setup utility. For additional information, see
“Configuring the server” on page 187.
v A minimum of one DIMM must be installed for each microprocessor. For
example, you must install a minimum of two DIMMs if the server has two
microprocessors installed. However, to improve system performance, install a
minimum of three DIMMs for each microprocessor.
v The maximum operating speed of the server is determined by the slowest DIMM
installed in the server.
v The server comes with a minimum of two 1 GB DIMMs, installed in connectors 3
and 6. When you install additional DIMMs, install them in the order shown in the

140 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
 following table to optimize system performance. In non-mirroring mode, all three
channels on the memory interface for each microprocessor can be populated in
any order and have no matching requirements.
Table 12. Non-mirroring (normal) mode DIMM installation sequence
Installed microprocessors DIMM connector population sequence
Microprocessor socket 1 3, 6, 8, 2, 5, 7, 1, 4
Microprocessor socket 2 11, 14, 16, 10, 13, 15, 9, 12

v The server supports memory mirroring (mirroring mode):

– Memory-mirroring mode replicates and stores data on two pairs of DIMMs
within two channels simultaneously. If a failure occurs, the memory controller
switches from the primary pair of memory DIMMs to the backup pair of
DIMMs. To enable memory mirroring through the Setup utility, select System
Settings → Memory. For more information, see “Using the Setup utility” on
page 191. When you use the memory mirroring feature, consider the following
information:
- When you use memory mirroring, you must install a pair of DIMMs at a
time. One DIMM must be in channel 0, and the mirroring DIMM must be in
the same slot in channel 1. The two DIMMs in each pair must be identical
in size, type, and rank (single or dual) , and organization, but not in speed.
The channels run at the speed of the slowest DIMM in any of the channels.
- Channel 2, DIMM connectors 8 ,7, 15, and 16 are not used in
memory-mirroring mode.
- The maximum available memory is reduced to half of the installed memory
when memory mirroring is enabled. For example, if you install 64 GB of
memory, only 32 GB of addressable memory is available when you use
memory mirroring.
The following diagram shows the memory channel interface layout with the DIMM
installation sequence for mirroring mode. The numbers within boxes indicate the
DIMM population sequence in pairs within the channels, and the numbers next to
the boxes indicate the DIMM connectors within the channels. For example, the
following illustration shows the first pair of DIMMs (indicated by ones (1) inside
the boxes) should be installed in DIMM connectors 3 on channel 0 and DIMM
connector 6 on channel 1 DIMM connectors 7, 8, 15, and 16 on channel 2 are
not used in memory-mirroring mode.

Figure 1. Memory channel interface layout

Chapter 4. Removing and replacing server components 141

 The following table lists the DIMM connectors on each memory channel.
Table 13. Connectors on each memory channel
Memory channel DIMM connectors
Channel 0 1, 2, 3, 9, 10, 11
Channel 1 4, 5, 6, 12, 13, 14
Channel 2 7, 8, 15, 16

The following illustration shows the memory connector layout that is associated
with each microprocessor. For example, DIMM connectors 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14,
15, and 16 (DIMM connectors are shown underneath the boxes) are associated
with microprocessor 2 slot (CPU2) and DIMM connectors 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, and
8 are associated with microprocessor 1 slot (CPU1). The numbers within the
boxes indicates the installation sequence of the DIMM pairs. For example, the
first DIMM pair (indicated within the boxes by ones (1)) should be installed in
DIMM connectors 3 and 6, which is associated with microprocessor 1 (CPU1).

Note: You can install DIMMs for microprocessor 2 as soon as you install
microprocessor 2; you do not have to wait until all of the DIMM slots for
microprocessor 1 are filled.

Figure 2. Memory connectors associated with each microprocessor for memory mirroring

The following table shows the installation sequence for installing DIMMs in
memory-mirroring mode:
Table 14. Memory-mirroring mode DIMM population sequence
Number of installed
DIMMs microprocessors DIMM connector
First pair of DIMMs 1 3, 6
Second pair of DIMMs 1 2, 5
Third pair of DIMMs 1 1, 4
Fourth pair of DIMMs 2 14, 11
Fifth pair of DIMMs 2 13, 10
Sixth pair of DIMMs 2 12, 9
Note: DIMM connectors 7, 8, 15, and 16 are not used in memory-mirroring mode.

v When you install or remove DIMMs, the server configuration information

changes. When you restart the server, the system displays a message that
indicates that the memory configuration has changed.

142 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
The following illustration shows the location of the DIMMs connectors on the system
board.
DIMM 12 connector DIMM 13 connector
DIMM 11 connector DIMM 14 connector
DIMM 10 connector DIMM 15 connector
DIMM 9 connector DIMM 16 connector

DIMM 8 connector DIMM 1 connector

DIMM 7 connector DIMM 2 connector
DIMM 6 connector DIMM 3 connector
DIMM 5 connector DIMM 4 connector

To install a DIMM, complete the following steps:

1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”
on page 119.
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices and disconnect the power cords and
all external cables, if necessary.
3. Remove the cover (see “Removing the cover” on page 122).
4. Open the retaining clip on each end of the DIMM connector.
Attention: To avoid breaking the retaining clips or damaging the DIMM
connectors, open and close the clips gently.

Chapter 4. Removing and replacing server components 143

 5. Touch the static-protective package that contains the DIMM to any unpainted
metal surface on the outside of the server. Then, remove the DIMM from the
package.
6. Turn the DIMM so that the DIMM keys align correctly with the connector.
7. Insert the DIMM into the connector by aligning the edges of the DIMM with the
slots at the ends of the DIMM connector (see “System-board optional device
connectors” on page 21 for the locations of the DIMM connectors).
8. Firmly press the DIMM straight down into the connector by applying pressure
on both ends of the DIMM simultaneously. The retaining clips snap into the
locked position when the DIMM is firmly seated in the connector.

Note: If there is a gap between the DIMM and the retaining clips, the DIMM
has not been correctly inserted; open the retaining clips, remove the DIMM,
and then reinsert it.
9. Reconnect the power cord and any cables that you removed.
10. Replace the cover (see “Installing the cover” on page 122).
11. Turn on the peripheral devices and the server.

Removing an IBM ServeRAID-BR10i SAS/SATA Controller

To remove an IBM ServeRAID-BR10i SAS/SATA controller from the system board,
complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”
on page 119.
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices and disconnect the power cords.

Note: When you disconnect the power source from the server, you lose the
ability to view the LEDs because the LEDs are not lit when the power source is
removed. Before you disconnect the power source, make a note of which LEDs
are lit, including the LEDs that are lit on the operation information panel, on the
light path diagnostics panel, and LEDs inside the server on the system board;
then, see “Light path diagnostics LEDs” on page 58 for information on how to
solve the problem.
3. Remove the cover (see “Removing the cover” on page 122).
4. Disconnect the signal cables that are attached to the drive backplane from the
connectors on the adapter.
5. Grasp the SAS/SATA adapter near the end next to the power-supply cage while
you press the black plastic tab (next to the power supply) toward the power
supply.
6. Pull up on the SAS/SATA adapter until the RAID riser-card assembly
disengages from the connector on the system board.

144 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
 7. Grasp the SAS/SATA adapter and pull it out of the connector on the RAID
riser-card assembly.

8. If you are instructed to return the SAS/SATA adapter, follow all packaging
instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to
you.

Installing an IBM ServeRAID-BR10i SAS/SATA Controller

Some server models come with an IBM ServeRAID-BR10i SAS/SATA Controller
installed. The adapter can be installed only in the dedicated slot on the SAS/SATA
RAID riser-card assembly on the system board (see “System-board optional device
connectors” on page 21 for the location of the connector). Use the connector on the
SAS/SATA RAID riser-card assembly for the RAID adapters. The IBM
ServeRAID-BR10i SAS/SATA adapter enables integrated RAID levels 0, 1, and 1E
capability on hot-swap hard disk drives. For configuration information, see the
ServeRAID documentation at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/. To install the
adapter if your server model did not come with this adapter, complete the following
steps to install an IBM ServeRAID-BR10i SAS/SATA Controller.

Important: To ensure that any of your ServeRAID 10i, 10is, or 10M adapters
function properly on UEFI-based servers, make sure that the adapter firmware level
is updated to at least 11.x.x-XXX , and the supporting drivers.

Attention: Some cluster solutions require specific code levels or coordinated code
updates. If the device is part of a cluster solution, verify that the latest level of code
is supported for the cluster solution before you update the code.

Chapter 4. Removing and replacing server components 145

 1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”
on page 119.
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices and disconnect the power cords.
3. Remove the cover (see “Removing the cover” on page 122).
4. Touch the static-protective package that contains the new ServeRAID-BR10i
SAS/SATA adapter to any unpainted surface on the outside of the server; then,
grasp the adapter by the top edge or upper corners of the adapter and remove
it from the package.
5. Align the ServeRAID-BR10i SAS/SATA adapter so that the keys align correctly
with the connector on the SAS/SATA RAID riser-card assembly.

6. Insert the SAS/SATA adapter into the connector on the SAS/SATA RAID
riser-card until it is firmly seated.
Attention: Incomplete insertion might cause damage to the server or the
adapter.

7. Tilt the SAS/SATA RAID riser-card assembly slightly and insert the end of the
adapter in the slot on the retention bracket as shown in the following
illustration. Make sure that the SAS/SATA RAID riser-card assembly keys align
correctly with the connector on the system board and press down on the
assembly until it is seated firmly into the connector on the system board.

146 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
 8. Route the signal cables from the drive backplane over the blue adapter
retention bracket as shown in the following illustration.

9. Take the signal cable that is attached to the drive backplane for drive bays 4
and 5 and connect it to the SAS/SATA RAID adapter connector that is closest
to the power supply cage. Connect the other signal cable so that is attached to
the drive backplane for drive bays 0 through 3 and connect it to the other
connector on the adapter.

Note: When you restart the server, you are prompted to import the existing
RAID configuration to the new ServeRAID adapter.
10. Reconnect the power cord and any cables that you removed.
11. Replace the cover (see “Installing the cover” on page 122).
12. Turn on the peripheral devices and the server.

Removing an optional IBM ServeRAID-MR10i SAS/SATA Controller

To remove an IBM ServeRAID-MR10i SAS/SATA controller, complete the following
steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”
on page 119.
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices and disconnect the power cords.

Chapter 4. Removing and replacing server components 147

 Note: When you disconnect the power source from the server, you lose the
ability to view the LEDs because the LEDs are not lit when the power source is
removed. Before you disconnect the power source, make a note of which LEDs
are lit, including the LEDs that are lit on the operation information panel, on the
light path diagnostics panel, and LEDs inside the server on the system board;
then, see “Light path diagnostics LEDs” on page 58 for information on how to
solve the problem.
3. Remove the cover (see “Removing the cover” on page 122).
4. Disconnect the signal cables and power cables from the existing SAS/SATA
adapter.
5. Carefully grasp the end of the SAS/SATA adapter next to the power-supply cage
while you press the black plastic tab (next to the power supply cage) toward the
power supply.
6. Pull up on the SAS/SATA adapter until the SAS/SATA RAID riser-card assembly
disengages from the connector on the system board.
7. If you are instructed to return the SAS/SATA adapter, follow all packaging
instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to
you.

Installing an optional IBM ServeRAID-MR10i SAS/SATA Controller

You can purchase an optional IBM ServeRAID-MR10i SAS/SATA controller. It can
be installed only in the dedicated slot on the SAS/SATA RAID rise-card assembly on
the system board (see “System-board optional device connectors” on page 21 for
the location of the connector). Use the connector on the SAS/SATA RAID riser-card
assembly to install the RAID adapters. The ServeRAID-MR10i adapter supports
RAID levels 0, 1, 5, 6, 10, 50, and 60. For configuration information, see the
ServeRAID documentation at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/.

Important: To ensure that any of your ServeRAID 10i, 10is, or 10M adapters
function properly on UEFI-based servers, make sure that the adapter firmware level
is updated to at least 11.x.x-XXX , and the supporting drivers.

Attention: Some cluster solutions require specific code levels or coordinated code
updates. If the device is part of a cluster solution, verify that the latest level of code
is supported for the cluster solution before you update the code.

To install an IBM ServeRAID-MR10i SAS/SATA adapter, complete the following

steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”
on page 119.
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices and disconnect the power cords.
3. Remove the cover (see “Removing the cover” on page 122).
4. Touch the static-protective package that contains the new ServeRAID-MR10i
SAS/SATA adapter to any unpainted surface on the outside of the server; then,
grasp the adapter by the top edge or upper corners of the adapter and remove
it from the package.
5. Align the ServeRAID-MR10i SAS/SATA adapter so that the keys align correctly
with the connector on the SAS/SATA RAID riser-card assembly.
6. Insert the SAS/SATA adapter into the connector on the SAS/SATA RAID
riser-card until it is firmly seated.
Attention: Incomplete insertion might cause damage to the server or the
adapter.

148 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
7. Tilt the SAS/SATA RAID riser-card assembly slightly and insert the end of the
adapter in the slot on the retention bracket as shown in the following
illustration. Make sure that the SAS/SATA RAID riser-card assembly keys align
correctly with the connector on the system board and press down on the
assembly until it is seated firmly into the connector on the system board.

8. Route the signal cables from the drive backplane over the blue adapter
retention bracket as shown in the following illustration.

Chapter 4. Removing and replacing server components 149

 9. Take the signal cable that is attached to the drive backplane for drive bays 4
and 5 and connect it to the connector on the SAS/SATA RAID adapter
connector that is closest to the power-supply cage. Connect the other signal
cable so that is attached to the drive backplane for drive bays 0 through 3 and
connect it to the other connector on the adapter.

Note: When you restart the server, you are prompted to import the existing
RAID configuration to the new ServeRAID adapter.
10. Replace the cover (see “Installing the cover” on page 122).
11. Slide the server in the rack.
12. Reconnect the power cord and any cables that you removed.
13. Turn on the peripheral devices and the server.

Removing a USB embedded hypervisor flash device

To remove a hypervisor flash device, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”
on page 119.
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices and disconnect the power cords.
3. Remove the cover (see “Removing the cover” on page 122).
4. Grasp the flash device blue lockbar (shown in the following illustration) and slide
it toward the SAS/SATA riser-card assembly to the unlock position and remove it
from the connector.

150 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
 5. If you are instructed to return the flash device, follow all packaging instructions,
and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to you.

Installing a USB embedded hypervisor flash device

To install a hypervisor flash device, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”
on page 119.
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices and disconnect the power cords.
3. Remove the cover (see “Removing the cover” on page 122).
4. Align the flash device with the connector on the SAS/SATA RAID riser-card
assembly and push it into the connector until it is firmly seated.
5. Slide the blue lockbar toward the flash device to the locked position until it is
seated firmly.

6. Reconnect the power cord and any cables that you removed.
7. Install the cover (see “Installing the cover” on page 122).
8. Slide the server into the rack.
9. Turn on the peripheral devices and the server.

Chapter 4. Removing and replacing server components 151

Removing a hot-swap power supply
When you remove or install a hot-swap power supply, observe the following
precautions.

Statement 5:

CAUTION:
The power control button on the device and the power switch on the power
supply do not turn off the electrical current supplied to the device. The device
also might have more than one power cord. To remove all electrical current
from the device, ensure that all power cords are disconnected from the power
source.

2
1

Statement 8:

CAUTION:
Never remove the cover on a power supply or any part that has the following
label attached.

Hazardous voltage, current, and energy levels are present inside any
component that has this label attached. There are no serviceable parts inside
these components. If you suspect a problem with one of these parts, contact
a service technician.

152 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
To remove a hot-swap power supply, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”
on page 119.
2. If only one power supply is installed, turn off the server and peripheral devices
and disconnect all power cords.
3. If the server is in a rack, at the back of the server, pull back the cable
management arm to gain access to the rear of the server and the power supply.
4. Press and hold the release tab to the left. Grasp the handle and pull the power
supply out of the server.

5. If you are instructed to return the power supply, follow all packaging instructions,
and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to you.

Chapter 4. Removing and replacing server components 153

Installing a hot-swap power supply
The following notes describe the type of power supply that the server supports and
other information that you must consider when you install a power supply:
v The server comes with one 675-watt hot-swap 12-volt output power supply. The
input voltage is 110 V ac or 220 V ac auto-sensing.
v You can order an optional power supply for redundancy.
v These power supplies are designed for parallel operation. In the event of a
power-supply failure, the redundant power supply continues to power the system.
The server supports a maximum of two power supplies.

Statement 5:

CAUTION:
The power control button on the device and the power switch on the power
supply do not turn off the electrical current supplied to the device. The device
also might have more than one power cord. To remove all electrical current
from the device, ensure that all power cords are disconnected from the power
source.

2
1
Statement 8

CAUTION:
Never remove the cover on a power supply or any part that has the following
label attached.

Hazardous voltage, current, and energy levels are present inside any
component that has this label attached. There are no serviceable parts inside
these components. If you suspect a with one of these parts, contact a service
technician.

154 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
 To install a hot-swap power supply, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins vii and “Installation guidelines” on page
119.
2. Touch the static-protective package that contains the hot-swap power supply to
any unpainted metal surface on the server; then, remove the power supply from
the package and place it on a static-protective surface.
3. If you are installing a hot-swap power supply into an empty bay, remove the
power-supply filler panel from the power-supply bay.

4. Grasp the handle on the rear of the power supply and slide the power supply
forward into the power-supply bay until it clicks. Make sure that the power
supply connects firmly into the power-supply connector.
5. Route the power cord through the handle so that it does not accidentally
become unplugged.
6. Connect the power cord for the new power supply to the power-cord connector
on the power supply.
7. Connect the other end of the power cord to a properly grounded electrical
outlet.
8. Make sure that the ac power LED and the dc power LED on the power supply
are lit, indicating that the power supply is operating correctly. The two green
LEDs are to the right of the power-cord connector.

Removing a hot-swap fan assembly

Attention: To ensure proper server operation, replace a failed fan within 30
seconds.

To remove a hot-swap-fan, complete the following steps:

1. Read the safety information that begins on page “Safety” on page vii and
“Installation guidelines” on page 119.
2. Remove the cover (see “Removing the cover” on page 122).

Chapter 4. Removing and replacing server components 155

 Note: The LED near the connector of the failing fan assembly is lit.
3. Grasp the orange fan tabs on both ends of the existing fan and pull it up out of
the server. If you are removing fans 3 or 4, lift up the clear tab on the DIMM air
baffle first.

Attention: To ensure proper operation, replace a failed fan within 30 seconds.

4. If you are instructed to return the fan, follow all of the packaging instructions,
and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to you.

156 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Installing a hot-swap fan assembly
The server comes standard with six dual-motor hot-swap cooling fans.

Attention: To ensure proper operation, replace a failed fan within 30 seconds.

To install an additional hot-swap fan, complete the following steps:

1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”
on page 119.
2. Remove the cover (see “Removing the cover” on page 122).
3. Touch the static-protective package that contains the new fan to any unpainted
metal surface on the server. Then, remove the new fan from the package.

4. Orient the fan over the fan slot in the fan assembly bracket so that the fan
connector aligns with the connector on the system board.

5. Insert the fan into the fan slot in the fan assembly bracket and press it down
until it is seated correctly in the slot and the fan connector is seated correctly in
the connector on the system board.

Chapter 4. Removing and replacing server components 157

 6. Install the cover (see “Installing the cover” on page 122).
7. Slide the server into the rack.

Removing the virtual media key

To remove the virtual media key, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”
on page 119.
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices and disconnect all power cords; then,
remove the cover (see “Removing the cover” on page 122).
3. Grasp the virtual media key and gently slide it up and off of the mounting tab.

4. If you are instructed to return the virtual media key, follow all packaging
instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to
you.

Installing the virtual media key

To install the virtual media key, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”
on page 119.
2. Remove the cover (see “Removing the cover” on page 122).
3. Align the virtual media key with the mounting tab and slide it down the tab onto
the connector on the system board. Press the virtual media key down into the
connector until it is firmly seated on the system board.

158 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
 4. Replace the cover (see “Installing the cover” on page 122).
5. Slide the server into the rack.
6. Reconnect the power cord and any cables that you removed.
7. Turn on the peripheral devices and the server.

Removing the optional two-port Ethernet adapter

To remove the Ethernet adapter, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”
on page 119.
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices and disconnect all power cords; then,
remove the cover (see “Removing the cover” on page 122).
3. Remove the PCI riser-card assembly from PCI riser connector 1 (see
“Removing a PCI riser-card assembly” on page 170.
4. Press the retention tabs away from the adapter.
5. Grasp the Ethernet adapter and disengage it from the connector on the system
board; then, slide it out of the slot on the rear of the chassis and lift it out of the
server.

Chapter 4. Removing and replacing server components 159

 6. If you are instructed to return the Ethernet adapter, follow all packaging
instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to
you.

Installing the optional two-port Ethernet adapter

To install the Ethernet adapter, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”
on page 119.
2. Remove the cover (see “Removing the cover” on page 122).
3. Touch the static-protective package that contains the Ethernet adapter to any
unpainted metal surface on the server. Then, remove the Ethernet adapter
from the package.
4. Remove the Ethernet adapter filler panel on the rear of the chassis (if it has
not been removed already).
5. Attach the Ethernet adapter bracket to the Ethernet adapter (if the bracket is
not already installed on the system board).
6. Align the adapter with the Ethernet adapter connector on the system board.

7. Lower the adapter onto the connector and press it firmly into the connector on
the system board until it is seated firmly.
8. Reinstall the PCI riser-card assembly in PCI riser connector 1 (see “Installing a
PCI riser-card assembly” on page 171.
9. Replace the cover (see “Installing the cover” on page 122).
10. Slide the server into the rack.
11. Reconnect the power cord and any cables that you removed.
12. Turn on the peripheral devices and the server.

160 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Removing the PCI riser-card bracket from the riser card
To remove the PCI riser-card bracket from the riser-card, complete the following
steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”
on page 119.
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices and disconnect all power cords.
3. Remove the cover (see “Removing the cover” on page 122).
4. Remove the PCI riser-card assembly (see “Removing a PCI riser-card
assembly” on page 170).
5. Remove the screw that attaches the PCI riser card to the PCI bracket.

6. If you are instructed to return the PCI bracket, follow all packaging instructions,
and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to you.

Installing the PCI riser-card bracket to the riser card

To install the PCI riser-card bracket to the riser card, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and the “Installation
guidelines” on page 119.
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices and disconnect the power cords and
all external cables.
3. Remove the cover (see “Removing the cover” on page 122).
4. Align the holes on the PCI riser card and the PCI bracket and install the screw
that attaches the PCI riser-card to the PCI bracket.

5. If you need to install an adapter, see “Installing an adapter” on page 127.

Chapter 4. Removing and replacing server components 161

 6. Install the PCI riser card assembly (see “Installing a PCI riser-card assembly”
on page 171).
7. Reconnect the cables for the adapter.
8. Install the cover (see “Installing the cover” on page 122).
9. Slide the server into the rack.
10. Reconnect the power cords and any cables that you removed.
11. Turn on the peripheral devices and the server.

Removing and replacing consumable parts and Tier 1 CRUs

Replacement of Tier 1 CRUs is your responsibility. If IBM installs a consumable part
or Tier 1 CRU at your request, you will be charged for the installation.

The illustrations in this document might differ slightly from your hardware.

Removing a remotely installed RAID adapter battery

If a RAID adapter battery is installed remotely on the microprocessor 2 air baffle
and you need to replace it, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”
on page 119.
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices and disconnect all power cords; then,
remove the cover (see “Removing the cover” on page 122).
3. From the top of the microprocessor 2 air baffle, remove the battery retention clip
that holds the battery in place. Press the release tab toward the front of the
server and remove the battery retention clip.
Battery
retention clip

Microprocessor 2
air baffle

Battery
Release
tab

4. Disconnect the remote battery cable from the remote battery cable connector on
the battery carrier and lift the battery and battery carrier from the slot. See the
following illustration for the location of the connectors on the battery carrier.

162 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
 5. Disconnect the battery cable from the battery cable connector on the battery
carrier.
6. Remove the three screws that attaches the battery carrier to the battery and
remove the battery from the battery carrier.

Note: If your battery and battery carrier are attached with a clip, squeeze the
clip on the side of the battery carrier to remove the battery from the battery
carrier.

If you are instructed to return the RAID adapter battery, follow all packaging
instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to you.

Installing a RAID adapter battery remotely in the server

When you install any RAID adapter that come with batteries in the PCI slot 1 and
PCI slot 2, it is sometimes necessary to install the batteries in another location in
the server to prevent the batteries from overheating. The batteries must be installed
only on top of the microprocessor 2 air baffle. To install the RAID adapter battery in
the server, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”
on page 119.
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices and disconnect all power cords and
external devices; then, remove the cover (see “Removing the cover” on page
122).
3. Install the RAID adapter on the riser-card and install the riser-card assembly in
the server (see “Installing a PCI riser-card assembly” on page 171).
4. Route the remote battery cable through the notches on the microprocessor 2 air
baffle.
Attention: Make sure that the cable is not pinched and does not cover any
connectors or obstruct any components on the system board.
5. Install the battery on the microprocessor 2 air baffle:
a. Connect the battery cable to the battery cable connector on the battery
carrier.

Chapter 4. Removing and replacing server components 163

 b. Place the battery carrier in the battery mounting slot on the microprocessor
2 air baffle and ensure that battery carrier posts align with the rings on the
battery mounting slot so that the battery carrier is secure in the slot.

Note: The positioning of the remote battery depends on the type of remote
battery that you install.
Battery
retention clip

Battery

Posts

Posts
Microprocessor 2
air baffle

Battery
mounting
slots

Rings

c. Take the battery retention clip and place it underneath the other tab while
pressing release tab toward the front of the server; then, press it down until
it snaps in place to hold the battery carrier firmly in place.
6. Install the cover.
7. Slide the server into the rack.
8. Reconnect the power cords and all external cables, and turn on the server and
peripheral devices.

164 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Removing the system battery
The following notes describe information that you must consider when replacing the
battery:
v IBM has designed this product with your safety in mind. The lithium battery must
be handled correctly to avoid possible danger. If you replace the battery, you
must adhere to the following instructions.

Note: In the U. S., call 1-800-IBM-4333 for information about battery disposal.
v If you replace the original lithium battery with a heavy-metal battery or a battery
with heavy-metal components, be aware of the following environmental
consideration. Batteries and accumulators that contain heavy metals must not be
disposed of with normal domestic waste. They will be taken back free of charge
by the manufacturer, distributor, or representative, to be recycled or disposed of
in a proper manner.
v To order replacement batteries, call 1-800-IBM-SERV within the United States,
and 1-800-465-7999 or 1-800-465-6666 within Canada. Outside the U.S. and
Canada, call your support center or business partner.

Note: After you replace the battery, you must reconfigure the server and reset
the system date and time.

Chapter 4. Removing and replacing server components 165

 Statement 2:

CAUTION:
When replacing the lithium battery, use only IBM Part Number 33F8354 or
an equivalent type battery recommended by the manufacturer. If your
system has a module containing a lithium battery, replace it only with the
same module type made by the same manufacturer. The battery contains
lithium and can explode if not properly used, handled, or disposed of.

Do not:
– Throw or immerse into water
– Heat to more than 100°C (212°F)
– Repair or disassemble

Dispose of the battery as required by local ordinances or regulations.

To remove the system-board battery, complete the following steps:

1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”
on page 119.
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices and disconnect all power cords; then,
remove the cover (see “Removing the cover” on page 122).
3. If necessary, lift the riser-card assembly out of the way (see “Removing an
adapter” on page 126).

166 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
 4. Remove the system-board battery:
a. Use one finger to push the battery horizontally away from the PCI riser card
in slot 2 and out of its housing.

b. Use your thumb and index finger to lift the battery from the socket.
5. Dispose of the battery as required by local ordinances or regulations. See the
IBM Environmental Notices and User’s Guide on the IBM System x
Documentation CD for more information.

Installing the system battery

The following notes describe information that you must consider when replacing the
system-board battery in the server.
v When replacing the system-board battery, you must replace it with a lithium
battery of the same type from the same manufacturer.
v To order replacement batteries, call 1-800-426-7378 within the United States, and
1-800-465-7999 or 1-800-465-6666 within Canada. Outside the U.S. and
Canada, call your IBM marketing representative or authorized reseller.
v After you replace the system-board battery, you must reconfigure the server and
reset the system date and time.
v To avoid possible danger, read and follow the following safety statement.

Chapter 4. Removing and replacing server components 167

 Statement 2:

CAUTION:
When replacing the lithium battery, use only IBM Part Number 33F8354 or an
equivalent type battery recommended by the manufacturer. If your system has
a module containing a lithium battery, replace it only with the same module
type made by the same manufacturer. The battery contains lithium and can
explode if not properly used, handled, or disposed of.

Do not:
v Throw or immerse into water
v Heat to more than 100°C (212°F)
v Repair or disassemble

Dispose of the battery as required by local ordinances or regulations.

To install the replacement system-board battery, complete the following steps:

1. Follow any special handling and installation instructions that come with the
replacement battery.
2. Insert the new battery:
a. Tilt the battery so that you can insert it into the socket on the side opposite
the battery clip.

b. Press the battery down into the socket until it clicks into place. Make sure
that the battery clip holds the battery securely.
3. Install the cover (see “Installing the cover” on page 122).
4. Slide the server into the rack.
5. Reconnect the external cables; then, reconnect the power cords and turn on the
peripheral devices and the server.
6. Start the Setup utility and reset the configuration.
v Set the system date and time.
v Set the power-on password.
v Reconfigure the server.
See “Using the Setup utility” on page 191 for details.

Removing and replacing Tier 2 CRUs

You may install a Tier 2 CRU yourself or request IBM to install it, at no additional
charge, under the type of warranty service that is designated for your server.

The illustrations in this document might differ slightly from your hardware.

168 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Removing the bezel
To remove the bezel, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”
on page 119.
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices and disconnect the power cords and
all external cables (see “Turning off the server” on page 14).
3. Remove the hard disk drives and filler panels from the hard disk drive bays (see
“Removing a hot-swap hard disk drive” on page 131).
4. Remove the screws from the bezel.

5. Remove the screws from the video connector.

6. Pull the top of the bezel out slightly; then, rotate it downward until the tabs on
the bottom of the bezel disengages from the chassis and set it aside.

Installing the bezel

To install the bezel, complete the following steps:
1. Insert the tabs on the bottom of the bezel into the holes on the chassis.
2. Rotate the bezel upward to the server and reinstall the bezel screws.

3. Reinstall the video connector screws.

4. Reinstall the hard disk drives and drive bay filler panels into the drive bays.

Chapter 4. Removing and replacing server components 169

 5. Install the cover (see “Installing the cover” on page 122).
6. Reconnect the power cords and any cables that you removed.
7. Slide the server into the rack.
8. Turn on the peripheral devices and the server.

Removing a PCI riser-card assembly

To remove a PCI riser-card assembly, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and the “Installation
guidelines” on page 119.
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices and disconnect the power cords and
all external cables.

Note: When you disconnect the power source from the server, you lose the
ability to view the LEDs because the LEDs are not lit when the power source is
removed. Before you disconnect the power source, make a note of which LEDs
are lit, including the LEDs that are lit on the operation information panel, on the
light path diagnostics panel, and LEDs inside the server on the system board;
then, see “Light path diagnostics LEDs” on page 58 for information on how to
solve the problem.
3. Remove the cover (see “Removing the cover” on page 122).
4. If an adapter is installed in the PCI riser-card assembly, disconnect any cables
that are connected to the adapter.
5. Grasp the rear of the PCI riser-card assembly from the rear and lift it out of the
PCI riser-card slot on the system board.

6. Remove the adapter, if one is present, from the PCI riser-card assembly.
7. Set the adapter and PCI riser-card assembly aside.

170 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Installing a PCI riser-card assembly
To replace a PCI riser-card assembly, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and the “Installation
guidelines” on page 119.
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices and disconnect the power cords and
all external cables.
3. Remove the cover (see “Removing the cover” on page 122).
4. Install the adapter in the new PCI riser-card assembly (see “Installing an
adapter” on page 127).
5. Set any jumpers or switches on the adapter as directed by the adapter
manufacturer.
6. Align the PCI riser-card assembly with the PCI slot connector on the system
board;: then, press down firmly until the PCI riser-card assembly is seated
correctly in the connector on the system board.
PCI riser card assembly
(full-height, half-lenght adapters)

PCI riser card assembly

(low-profile adapters)

PCI riser
connector 2

PCI riser
connector 1

Removing the hot-swap SAS/SATA hard disk drive backplane

To remove the hot-swap SAS/SATA hard disk drive backplane, complete the
following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”
on page 119.
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices and disconnect all power cords.
3. Remove the cover (see “Removing the cover” on page 122).
4. Pull the hard disk drives and filler panels out of the server slightly to disengage
them from the hard disk drive backplane.
5. Remove fans 4, 5, and 6.
6. Disconnect all cables from the hard disk drive backplane.

Note: You can also choose to disconnect the cables after removing the
backplane from the brackets, if that is easier for you.

Chapter 4. Removing and replacing server components 171

 7. Lift the hard disk drive backplane up to disengage the backplane tabs from the
slots on the backplane bracket; then, push the backplane backwards until it is
clear of the slots on the bracket and remove it from the server.

8. If you are instructed to return the hard disk drive backplane, follow all packaging
instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to
you.

Installing the hot-swap SAS/SATA hard disk drive backplane

To install the replacement hot-swap SAS/SATA hard disk drive backplane, complete
the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”
on page 119.
2. Align the tabs on the hard disk drive backplane with the slots on the backplane
bracket.
3. Insert the hard disk drive backplane tabs into slots on the backplane bracket
and push the hard disk drive backplane down until the backplane is fully
seated and the tabs locked in place.

Note: You can reconnect the cables to the hard disk drive backplane before
installing the backplane onto the brackets or you can connect the cables after
you install the backplane, if that is easier for you.

172 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
 4. Reconnect the cables to the hard disk drive backplane.
5. Reinstall the fans.
6. Reinstall the hard disk drives and filler panels.
7. Install the cover (see “Installing the cover” on page 122).
8. Slide the server into the rack.
9. Reconnect the power cords and any cables that you removed.
10. Turn on the peripheral devices and the server.

Removing the operator information panel assembly

To remove the operator information panel, complete the following steps.
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”
on page 119.
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices and disconnect all power cords; then,
remove the cover (see “Removing the cover” on page 122).
3. Disconnect the cable from the back of the operator information panel assembly.
4. Use an object to push down on the release tab; hold down the release tab and
push the blue push point on the rear of the panel to the front of the server.

Chapter 4. Removing and replacing server components 173

 5. From the front of the server, carefully pull the assembly out of the server while
you move it slightly from side to side.
6. If you are instructed to return the operator information panel assembly, follow all
packaging instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are
supplied to you.

Installing the operator information panel assembly

To install the operator information panel, complete the following steps.
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”
on page 119.
2. From the front of the server, slide the operator information panel into the server
until it clicks into place.
3. Inside the server, connect the cable to the rear of the operator information panel
assembly.

The following illustration shows the cable routing for the operator information
panel:

Note: The operation information panel cable should go in between the

Video/USB cable (on the bottom) and the CD/DVD cable (on the top) when all
three cables are installed in the server.

174 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
 4. Install the cover (see “Installing the cover” on page 122).
5. Slide the server into the rack.
6. Reconnect the power cords and any cables that you removed.
7. Turn on the peripheral devices and the server.

Removing and replacing FRUs

FRUs must be replaced or installed only by trained service technicians.

The illustrations in this document might differ slightly from the hardware.

Removing the 240 VA safety cover

To remove the 240 VA safety cover, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”
on page 119.
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices and disconnect all power cords; then,
remove the cover (see “Removing the cover” on page 122).
3. Remove the SAS/SATA riser-card assembly (see “Removing a PCI riser-card
assembly” on page 170).
4. Remove the screw from the safety cover.

Chapter 4. Removing and replacing server components 175

 5. Disconnect the hard disk drive backplane cables from the connector on the front
of the safety cover.
6. Slide the safety cover forward to disengage it from the system board, then lift it
out of the server.
7. If you are instructed to return the safety cover, follow all packaging instructions,
and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to you.

Installing the 240 VA safety cover

To install the 240 VA safety cover, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”
on page 119.
2. Align the tabs on the bottom of the safety cover with the slots on the system
board and lower the safety cover into the system board.

176 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
 3. Slide the safety cover toward the back of the server until it is secure.
4. Connect the hard disk drive backplane cables into the connector in front of the
safety cover.
5. Install the screw to secure the safety cover.
6. Install the SAS/SATA riser-card assembly (see“Installing the SAS/SATA RAID
riser-card assembly” on page 130).
7. Install the cover (see “Installing the cover” on page 122).
8. Slide the server into the rack.
9. Reconnect the power cords and any cables that you removed.
10. Turn on the peripheral devices and the server.

Removing a microprocessor and heat sink

Attention:
v Do not allow the thermal grease on the microprocessor and heat sink to come in
contact with anything. Contact with any surface can compromise the thermal
grease and the microprocessor socket.
v Do not touch the microprocessor contacts; handle the microprocessor by the
edges only. Contaminants on the microprocessor contacts, such as oil from your
skin, can cause connection failures between the contacts and the socket.

To remove a microprocessor and heat sink, complete the following steps:

1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”
on page 119.
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices and disconnect all power cords; then,
remove the cover (see “Removing the cover” on page 122).
3. Disconnect any cables that impede access to the heat sink and microprocessor.
4. Open the heat sink release lever to the fully open position.
5. Lift the heat sink out of the server. After removal, place the heat sink on its side
on a clean, flat surface.

Chapter 4. Removing and replacing server components 177

 6. Release the microprocessor retention latch by pressing down on the end,
moving it to the side, and releasing it to the open (up) position.
7. Open the microprocessor bracket frame by lifting up the tab on the top edge.
Keep the bracket frame in the open position.

8. Carefully lift the microprocessor straight up and out of the socket, and place it
on a static-protective surface.
9. If you are instructed to return the microprocessor, follow all packaging
instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to
you.

Installing a microprocessor and heat sink

The following notes describe the type of microprocessor that the server supports
and other information that you must consider when you install a microprocessor and
heat sink:
v The server supports up to two Intel Xeon® dual-core or quad-core
microprocessors. See http://www.ibm.com/servers/eserver/serverproven/compat/
us/ for a list of supported microprocessors.
v Do not mix dual-core and quad-core microprocessors in the same server.
v The upgrade of microprocessors are not supported on this server. For example, if
the server came with a 2.0 GHz microprocessor, you cannot upgrade the
microprocessor to a 2.3 GHz microprocessor, it is not supported.
v The first microprocessor must always be installed in microprocessor socket 1 on
the system board.
v When one microprocessor is installed, a heat sink filler is not required for
microprocessor socket 2, however, the microprocessor 2 air baffle and the DIMM
air baffle must be installed to provide proper system cooling.

178 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v Do not remove the first microprocessor from the system board when you install
the second microprocessor.
v When you install the second microprocessor, you must also install additional
memory. See “Installing a memory module” on page 139 for details about the
installation sequence.
v To ensure proper server operation when you install an additional microprocessor,
use microprocessors that have the same QuickPath Interconnect (QPI) link
speed, integrated memory controller frequency, core frequency, power segment,
internal cache size, and type.
v Mixing microprocessors of different stepping levels within the same server model
is supported.
v When mixing microprocessors with different stepping levels within the same
server model, you do not have to install the microprocessor with lowest stepping
level and features in microprocessor socket 1.
v Both microprocessor voltage regulator modules are integrated on the system
board.
v If you have to replace a microprocessor, call for service.
v Read the documentation that comes with the microprocessor, so that you can
determine whether you have to update the server firmware. To download the
latest level of server firmware and other code updates for your server, complete
the following steps:
1. Go to http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/.
2. Under Product support, click System x.
3. Under Popular links, click Software and device drivers.
4. Click IBM System x3550 M2 to display the matrix of downloadable files for
the server.
v The microprocessor speeds are automatically set for this server; therefore, you
do not have to set any microprocessor frequency-selection jumpers or switches.
v If the thermal-grease protective cover (for example, a plastic cap or tape liner) is
removed from the heat sink, do not touch the thermal grease on the bottom of
the heat sink or set down the heat sink. For more information about applying or
working with thermal grease, see “Thermal grease” on page 181.

Note: Removing the heat sink from the microprocessor destroys the even
distribution of the thermal grease and requires replacing the thermal grease.
v To order an additional optional microprocessor, contact your IBM marketing
representative or authorized reseller.

To install an additional microprocessor and heat sink, complete the following steps:

Attention: When you handle static-sensitive devices, take precautions to avoid

damage from static electricity. For details about handling these devices, see
“Handling static-sensitive devices” on page 121.
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”
on page 119.
2. Install the microprocessor:
a. Press down and out on the release lever on microprocessor socket and lift
up the microprocessor release lever until it stops in the fully open position.

Chapter 4. Removing and replacing server components 179

 b. Lift the hinged microprocessor bracket frame into an open position and
remove the microprocessor dust cover, tape, or label from the surface of the
microprocessor socket, if one is present. Store the dust cover in a safe
place.
Attention: When you handle static-sensitive devices, take precautions to
avoid damage from static electricity. For details about handling these
devices, see “Handling static-sensitive devices” on page 121.
c. Touch the static-protective package that contains the new microprocessor to
any unpainted metal surface on the server; then, remove the microprocessor
from the package.
Attention:
v Do not touch the microprocessor contacts; handle the microprocessor by
the edges only. Contaminants on the microprocessor contacts, such as oil
from your skin, can cause connection failures between the contacts and
the socket.
v Handle the microprocessor carefully. Dropping the microprocessor during
installation or removal can damage the contacts.
v Do not use excessive force when you press the microprocessor into the
socket.
v Make sure that the microprocessor is oriented and aligned and positioned
in the socket before you try to close the lever.
d. Align the microprocessor with the socket (note the alignment mark and the
position of the notches); then, carefully place the microprocessor on the
socket and close the microprocessor bracket frame.

Note: The microprocessor fits only one way on the socket.

e. Carefully close the microprocessor release lever to the closed position to

secure the microprocessor in the socket.
3. Install the heat sink:
a. Clean the grease from the heat sink and apply new grease on the
microprocessor.
b. Align the heat sink on top of the microprocessor.
c. Lower the rear flange of the heat sink into the opening in the retainer
bracket and press down firmly on the front of the heat sink until it is seated
securely.

180 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
 d. Rotate the heat-sink release lever to the closed position and hook it
underneath the lock tab.
4. If you removed the microprocessor 2 air baffle, install it (see “Installing the
microprocessor 2 air baffle” on page 124).

Thermal grease
The thermal grease must be replaced whenever the heat sink has been removed
from the top of the microprocessor and is going to be reused or when debris is
found in the grease.

When you are installing the heat sink on the same microprocessor that is was
removed from, make sure that the following requirements are met:
v The thermal grease on the heat sink and microprocessor is not contaminated.
v Additional thermal grease is not added to the existing thermal grease on the heat
sink and microprocessor.

Note:
v Read the Safety information on page vii.
v Read the “Installation guidelines” on page 119.
v Read “Handling static-sensitive devices” on page 121.

To replace damaged or contaminated thermal grease on the microprocessor and

heat sink, complete the following steps:
1. Place the heat sink on a clean work surface.
2. Remove the cleaning pad from its package and unfold it completely.
3. Use the cleaning pad to wipe the thermal grease from the bottom of the heat
sink.

Note: Make sure that all of the thermal grease is removed.

4. Use a clean area of the cleaning pad to wipe the thermal grease from the
microprocessor; then, dispose of the cleaning pad after all of the thermal grease
is removed.

Chapter 4. Removing and replacing server components 181

 0.02 mL of thermal
grease

Microprocessor

5. Use the thermal-grease syringe to place 9 uniformly spaced dots of 0.02 mL

each on the top of the microprocessor. The outermost dots must be within
approximately 5 mm of the edge of the microprocessor; this is to ensure uniform
distribution of the grease.

Note: If the grease is properly applied, approximately half of the grease will
remain in the syringe.
6. Install the heat sink onto the microprocessor as described in “Installing a
microprocessor and heat sink” on page 178.

Removing the heat sink retention module

To remove a heat sink retention module, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”
on page 119.
2. Turn off the server and any attached devices.
3. Turn off the peripheral devices and disconnect all power cords; then, remove
the cover (see “Removing the cover” on page 122).
4. Remove the applicable air baffle.
5. Remove the microprocessor and heat sink (see “Removing the microprocessor
2 air baffle” on page 123).
Attention: When you remove a microprocessor and heat sink, be sure to
keep each heat sink with its microprocessor for reinstallation.
6. Use a T8 torx screwdriver and remove the four screws that secure the retention
module to the system board; then, lift the retention module from the system
board.

182 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
 7. If you are instructed to return the heat sink retention module, follow all the
packaging instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are
supplied to you.

Installing a heat sink retention module

To install a heat sink retention module, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”
on page 119.
2. Align the retention module with the holes on the system board.
3. Use the T8 torx screwdriver to reinstall the four screws that you removed earlier.

4. Reinstall the microprocessor and heat sink (see “Installing a microprocessor and
heat sink” on page 178).
5. Reinstall the air baffle.
6. Install the cover (see “Installing the cover” on page 122).
7. Slide the server into the rack.
8. Reconnect the power cords and any cables that you removed.
9. Turn on the peripheral devices and the server.

Removing the system board

To remove the system board, complete the following steps.
Notes:
1. When you replace the system board, make sure that you remove the virtual
media key and place it on the new system board. For information about the
location of the key, see “Removing the virtual media key” on page 158.
2. When you replace the system board, you must either update the server with the
latest firmware or restore the pre-existing firmware that the customer provides
on a diskette or CD image. Make sure that you have the latest firmware or a
copy of the pre-existing firmware before you proceed.
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”
on page 119.
2. Turn off the server and any attached devices.
3. Turn off the peripheral devices and disconnect all power cords; then, remove
the cover (see “Removing the cover” on page 122).

Note: When you replace the system board, you must either update the server
with the latest firmware or restore the pre-existing firmware that the customer
provides on a diskette or CD image. Make sure that you have the latest
firmware or a copy of the pre-existing firmware before you proceed.

Chapter 4. Removing and replacing server components 183

 4. Remove all PCI riser-card assemblies and adapters (see “Removing a PCI
riser-card assembly” on page 170 and “Removing an adapter” on page 126).
5. Remove the SAS/SATA RAID riser-card assembly and then remove the base
(see “Removing an IBM ServeRAID-BR10i SAS/SATA Controller” on page
144).
6. Remove the microprocessor 2 and DIMM air baffles from the system board
(see “Removing the microprocessor 2 air baffle” on page 123 and “Removing
the DIMM air baffle” on page 124).
7. Remove all heat sinks and microprocessors, and set them aside on a
static-protective surface for reinstallation (see “Removing a microprocessor and
heat sink” on page 177).
8. Remove the memory modules and set them aside on a static-protective
surface for reinstallation (see “Removing a memory module” on page 139).

Note: Make a note of the location of each DIMM as you remove it, so that you
can later reinstall it in the same connector.
9. Remove the virtual media key from the system board and set it aside. You will
have to install the virtual media key on the new system board.
10. Disconnect all cables from the system board. Make a list of each cable as you
disconnect it; you can then use this as a checklist when you install the new
system board.
11. Remove the hot-swap fans (see “Removing a hot-swap fan assembly” on page
155).
12. Press the fan brackets release latches (one is to the left of fan 6 and one is to
the right of fan 1) inward toward the fans and rotate the fan assembly brackets
up toward the front of the server.
13. Grasp the system board handle and lift up the right side of the system board
slightly so that it disengages from the locator pin; then, slide the system board
slightly toward the left of the server.

184 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
 14. Lift up the system board and carefully remove it from the server, being careful
not to damage any surrounding components.
15. If you are instructed to return the system board, follow all packaging
instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to
you.

Installing the system board

Notes:
1. When you reassemble the components in the server, be sure to route all cables
carefully so that they are not exposed to excessive pressure.
2. When you replace the system board, you must either update the server with the
latest firmware or restore the pre-existing firmware that the customer provides
on a diskette or CD image. Make sure that you have the latest firmware or a
copy of the pre-existing firmware before you proceed. See “Updating the
firmware” on page 187, “Updating the Universal Unique Identifier (UUID)” on
page 205, and “Updating the DMI/SMBIOS data” on page 207 for more
information.

Important: Some cluster solutions require specific code levels or coordinated code
updates. If the device is part of a cluster solution, verify that the latest level of code
is supported for the cluster solution before you update the code

To install the system board, complete the following steps:

1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”
on page 119.
2. Align the system board with the chassis; then, lower the system board into the
chassis and slide the system board toward the rear of the server until the
system board is seated firmly into the locator pins on the chassis.

3. Grasp the fan assembly brackets and rotate them down toward the chassis.
Chapter 4. Removing and replacing server components 185
 4. Reinstall the hot-swap fans (see “Installing a hot-swap fan assembly” on page
157).
5. Reinstall the microprocessor and heat sink (see “Installing a microprocessor
and heat sink” on page 178).
6. Reinstall the SAS/SATA RAID riser-card assembly base (see “Installing a PCI
riser-card assembly” on page 171).
7. Reinstall the DIMMs (see “Installing a memory module” on page 139).
8. Reinstall the microprocessor 2 and DIMM air baffles (see “Installing the
microprocessor 2 air baffle” on page 124 and “Installing the DIMM air baffle” on
page 125).
9. Reinstall the PCI riser-card assemblies and adapters, if any were installed (see
“Installing a PCI riser-card assembly” on page 171 and “Installing an adapter”
on page 127).
10. Reinstall the virtual media key (see “Installing the virtual media key” on page
158).
11. Reconnect to the system board the cables that you disconnected in step 11 of
“Removing the system board” on page 183.
12. Install the cover (see “Installing the cover” on page 122).
13. Slide the server into the rack.
14. Reconnect the power cords and any cables that you removed.
15. Turn on the peripheral devices and the server.

Important: Perform the following updates:

v Either update the server with the latest RAID firmware or restore the pre-existing
firmware from a diskette or CD image.
v Update the UUID (see “Updating the Universal Unique Identifier (UUID)” on page
205).
v Update the DMI/SMBIOS (see “Updating the DMI/SMBIOS data” on page 207).

186 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Chapter 5. Configuration information and instructions
This chapter provides information about updating the firmware and using the
configuration utilities.

Updating the firmware

Important:: Some cluster solutions require specific code levels or coordinated
code updates. If the device is part of a cluster solution, verify that the latest level of
code is supported for the cluster solution before you update the code.

The firmware for the server is periodically updated and is available for download on
the IBM Web site. To check for the latest level of firmware, such as the server
firmware, vital product data (VPD) code, device drivers, and service processor
firmware complete the following steps.

Note: Changes are made periodically to the IBM Web site. The actual procedure
might vary slightly from what is described in this document.
1. Go to http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/.
2. Under Product support, click System x.
3. Under Popular links, click Software and device drivers.
4. Click System x3550 M2 to display the matrix of downloadable files for the
server.

Download the latest firmware for the server; then, install the firmware, using the
instructions that are included with the downloaded files.

When you replace a device in the server, you might have to either update the
firmware that is stored in memory on the device or restore the pre-existing firmware
from a diskette or CD image.

The following items are downloadable at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/:

v Server firmware is stored in ROM on the system board.
v IMM firmware is stored in ROM on the system board.
v Ethernet firmware is stored in ROM on the Ethernet controller.
v ServeRAID firmware is stored in ROM on the ServeRAID adapter.
v SAS/SATA firmware is stored in ROM on the SAS/SATA controller on the system
board.

Configuring the server

The ServerGuide program provides software-setup tools and installation tools that
are designed for the server. Use this CD during the installation of the server to
configure basic hardware features, such as an integrated SAS/SATA controller with
RAID capabilities, and to simplify the installation of your operating system. For
information about using this CD, see “Using the ServerGuide Setup and Installation
CD” on page 189.

In addition to the ServerGuide Setup and Installation CD, you can use the following
configuration programs to customize the server hardware:
v Setup utility

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009 187

 The Setup utility is part of the basic input/output system firmware. Use it to
change interrupt request (IRQ) settings, change the startup-device sequence, set
the date and time, and set passwords. For information about using this program,
see “Using the Setup utility” on page 191.
v Boot Manager program
The Boot Manager program is part of the server firmware. Use it to override the
startup sequence that is set in the Setup utility and temporarily assign a device to
be first in the startup sequence. For more information about using this program,
see “Using the Boot Manager program” on page 197.
v Integrated Management Module
Use the integrated management module (IMM) for configuration, to update the
firmware and sensor data record/field replaceable unit (SDR/FRU) data, and to
remotely manage a network. For information about using these programs, see
“Using the integrated management module” on page 197.
v VMware ESXi embedded hypervisor
The VMware ESXi embedded hypervisor is available on the server models that
come with an installed USB embedded hypervisor flash device. The USB flash
device is installed in the USB connector on the SAS/SATA RAID riser-card.
Hypervisor is virtualization software that enables multiple operating systems to
run on a host system at the same time. For more information about using the
embedded hypervisor, see “Using the embedded hypervisor” on page 198.
v Remote presence capability and blue-screen capture
The remote presence and blue-screen capture feature are integrated into the
Integrated Management Module (IMM). The virtual media key is required to
enable the remote presence functions. When the optional virtual media key is
installed in the server, it activates the remote presence functions. Without the
virtual media key, you will not be able to access the network remotely to mount
or unmount drives or images on the client system. However, you will still be able
to access the host graphical user interface through the Web interface without the
Virtual Media Key. You can order the optional IBM Virtual Media Key, if one did
not come with your server. For more information about how to enable the remote
presence function, see “Using the remote presence capability and blue-screen
capture” on page 199.
v Ethernet controller configuration
For information about configuring the Ethernet controller, see “Configuring the
Gigabit Ethernet controller” on page 201.
v IBM Advanced Settings Utility (ASU) program
Use this program as an alternative to the Setup utility for modifying UEFI
settings. Use the ASU program online or out of band to modify UEFI settings
from the command line without the need to restart the server to access the Setup
utility. For more information about using this program, see “IBM Advanced
Settings Utility program” on page 203.
v LSI Configuration Utility program
Use the LSI Configuration Utility program to configure the integrated SAS/SATA
controller with RAID capabilities and the devices that are attached to it. For
information about using this program, see “Using the LSI Configuration Utility
program” on page 202.
The following table lists the different server configurations and the applications
that are available for configuring and managing RAID arrays.

188 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
 Table 15. Server configuration and applications for configuring and managing RAID arrays
RAID array configuration RAID array management
(before operating system is (after operating system is
Server configuration installed) installed)
ServeRAID-BR10i adapter LSI Utility (Setup utility, press MegaRAID Storage Manager
(LSI 1068) installed Ctrl+C), ServerGuide (for monitoring storage only)
ServeRAID-MR10i adapter MegaRAID Storage Manager MegaRAID Storage Manager
(LSI 1078) installed (MSM),, MegaRAID BIOS (MSM)
Configuration Utility (press C
to start), ServerGuide

Using the ServerGuide Setup and Installation CD

The ServerGuide Setup and Installation CD provides software setup tools and
installation tools that are designed for your server. The ServerGuide program
detects the server model and hardware options that are installed and uses that
information during setup to configure the hardware. The ServerGuide program
simplifies operating-system installations by providing updated device drivers and, in
some cases, installing them automatically. To download the CD, go to
http://www.ibm.com/systems/management/serverguide/sub.html and click IBM
Service and Support Site.

The ServerGuide program has the following features:

v An easy-to-use interface
v Diskette-free setup, and configuration programs that are based on detected
hardware
v ServeRAID Manager program, which configures your ServeRAID adapter
v Device drivers that are provided for your server model and detected hardware
v Operating-system partition size and file-system type that are selectable during
setup

ServerGuide features
Features and functions can vary slightly with different versions of the ServerGuide
program. To learn more about the version that you have, start the ServerGuide
Setup and Installation CD and view the online overview. Not all features are
supported on all server models.

The ServerGuide program requires a supported IBM server with an enabled

startable (bootable) CD drive. In addition to the ServerGuide Setup and Installation
CD, you must have your operating-system CD to install the operating system.

The ServerGuide program performs the following tasks:

v Sets system date and time
v Detects the RAID adapter or controller and runs the SAS/SATA RAID
configuration program
v Checks the microcode (firmware) levels of a ServeRAID adapter and determines
whether a later level is available from the CD
v Detects installed hardware options and provides updated device drivers for most
adapters and devices
v Provides diskette-free installation for supported Windows® operating systems
v Includes an online readme file with links to tips for your hardware and
operating-system installation

Chapter 5. Configuration information and instructions 189

 Setup and configuration overview
When you use the ServerGuide Setup and Installation CD, you do not need setup
diskettes. You can use the CD to configure any supported IBM server model. The
setup program provides a list of tasks that are required to set up your server model.
On a server with a ServeRAID adapter or SAS/SATA controller with RAID
capabilities, you can run the SAS RAID configuration program to create logical
drives.

Note: Features and functions can vary slightly with different versions of the
ServerGuide program.

When you start the ServerGuide Setup and Installation CD, the program prompts
you to complete the following tasks:
v Select your language.
v Select your keyboard layout and country.
v View the overview to learn about ServerGuide features.
v View the readme file to review installation tips for your operating system and
adapter.
v Start the operating-system installation. You will need your operating-system CD.

Typical operating-system installation

The ServerGuide program can reduce the time it takes to install an operating
system. It provides the device drivers that are required for your hardware and for
the operating system that you are installing. This section describes a typical
ServerGuide operating-system installation.

Note: Features and functions can vary slightly with different versions of the
ServerGuide program.
1. After you have completed the setup process, the operating-system installation
program starts. (You will need your operating-system CD to complete the
installation.)
2. The ServerGuide program stores information about the server model, service
processor, hard disk drive controllers, and network adapters. Then, the program
checks the CD for newer device drivers. This information is stored and then
passed to the operating-system installation program.
3. The ServerGuide program presents operating-system partition options that are
based on your operating-system selection and the installed hard disk drives.
4. The ServerGuide program prompts you to insert your operating-system CD and
restart the server. At this point, the installation program for the operating system
takes control to complete the installation.

Installing your operating system without using ServerGuide

If you have already configured the server hardware and you are not using the
ServerGuide program to install your operating system, complete the following steps
to download the latest operating-system installation instructions from the IBM Web
site.

Note: Changes are made periodically to the IBM Web site. The actual procedure
might vary slightly from what is described in this document.
1. Go to http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/.
2. Under Product support, click System x.
3. From the menu on the left side of the page, click System x support search.
4. From the Task menu, select Install.

190 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
 5. From the Product family menu, select System x3550 M2.
6. From the Operating system menu, select your operating system, and then click
Search to display the available installation documents.

Using the Setup utility

Use the Unified Extensible Firmware Interface (UEFI), formerly BIOS, Setup utility
to perform the following tasks:
v View configuration information
v View and change assignments for devices and I/O ports
v Set the date and time
v Set the startup characteristics of the server and the order of startup devices
v Set and change settings for advanced hardware features
v View, set, and change settings for power-management features
v View and clear error logs
v Change interrupt request (IRQ) settings
v Resolve configuration conflicts

Starting the Setup utility

To start the Setup utility, complete the following steps:
1. Turn on the server.

Note: Approximately 1 to 3 minutes after the server is connected to ac power,

the power-control button becomes active.
2. When the prompt <F1> Setup is displayed, press F1. If you have set an
administrator password, you must type the administrator password to access the
full Setup utility menu. If you do not type the administrator password, a limited
Setup utility menu is available.
3. Select settings to view or change.

Setup utility menu choices

The following choices are on the Setup utility main menu for the UEFI. Depending
on the version of the firmware, some menu choices might differ slightly from these
descriptions.
v System Information
Select this choice to view information about the server. When you make changes
through other choices in the Setup utility, some of those changes are reflected in
the system information; you cannot change settings directly in the system
information. This choice is on the full Setup utility menu only.
– System Summary
Select this choice to view configuration information, including the ID, speed,
and cache size of the microprocessors, machine type and model of the server,
the serial number, the system UUID, and the amount of installed memory.
When you make configuration changes through other options in the Setup
utility, the changes are reflected in the system summary; you cannot change
settings directly in the system summary.
– Product Data
Select this choice to view the system-board identifier, the revision level or
issue date of the firmware, the integrated management module and
diagnostics code, and the version and date.
This choice is on the full Setup utility menu only.

Chapter 5. Configuration information and instructions 191

 v System Settings
Select this choice to view or change the server component settings.
– Processors
Select this choice to view or change the processor settings.
– Memory
Select this choice to view or change the memory settings.
– Devices and I/O Ports
Select this choice to view or change assignments for devices and input/output
(I/O) ports. You can configure the serial ports, configure remote console
redirection, enable or disable integrated Ethernet controllers, the SAS/SATA
controller, SATA optical drive channels, PCI slots, and view the system
Ethernet MAC addresses. If you disable a device, it cannot be configured, and
the operating system will not be able to detect it (this is equivalent to
disconnecting the device).
– Power
Select this choice to view or change power capping to control consumption,
processors, and performance states.
– Legacy Support
Select this choice to view or set legacy support.
- Force Legacy Video on Boot
Select this choice to force INT video support, if the operating system does
not support UEFI video output standards.
- Rehook INT
Select this choice to enable or disable devices from taking control of the
boot process. The default is Disable.
- Legacy Thunk Support
Select this choice to enable or disable UEFI to interact with PCI mass
storage devices that are non-UEFI compliant.
– Integrated Management Module
Select this choice to view or change the settings for the integrated
management module.
- POST Watchdog Timer
Select this choice to view or enable the POST watchdog timer.
- POST Watchdog Timer Value
Select this choice to view or set the POST loader watchdog timer value.
- Reboot System on NMI
Enable or disable restarting the system whenever a nonmaskable interrupt
(NMI) occurs. Disabled is the default.
- Disallow commands on USB Interface
Select this choice to enable or disable the Ethernet over USB interface on
IMM.
- Network Configuration
Select this choice to view the system management network interface port,
the IMM MAC address, the current IMM IP address, and host name; define
the static IMM IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address, specify
whether to use the static IP address or have DHCP assign the IMM IP
address, save the network changes, and reset the IMM.
- Reset IMM to Defaults

192 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
 Select this choice to view or reset IMM to the default settings.
- Reset IMM
Select this choice to reset IMM.
– System Security
Select this choice to view or configure Trusted Platform Module (TPM)
support.
– Adapters and UEFI Drivers
Select this choice to view information about the UEFI 1.10 and UEFI 2.0
compliant adapters and drivers installed in the server.
– Network
Select this choice to view or configure the network device options, such as
iSCSI, PXE, and network devices.

Note: The configuration forms for UEFI 2.1 and greater compliant add-on
network devices might be located here.
– Storage
Select this choice to view or configure the storage device options.

Note: The configuration forms for UEFI 2.1 and greater compliant add-on
storage devices might be located here.
– Video
Select this choice to view or configure the video device options.

Note: The configuration forms for UEFI 2.1 and greater compliant add-on
video devices might be located here.
v Date and Time
Select this choice to set the date and time in the server, in 24-hour format
(hour:minute:second).
This choice is on the full Setup utility menu only.
v Start Options
Select this choice to view or change the start options, including the startup
sequence, keyboard NumLock state, PXE boot option, and PCI device boot
priority. Changes in the startup options take effect when you start the server.
The startup sequence specifies the order in which the server checks devices to
find a boot record. The server starts from the first boot record that it finds. If the
server has Wake on LAN hardware and software and the operating system
supports Wake on LAN functions, you can specify a startup sequence for the
Wake on LAN functions. For example, you can define a startup sequence that
checks for a disc in the CD-RW/DVD drive, then checks the hard disk drive, and
then checks a network adapter.
This choice is on the full Setup utility menu only.
v Boot Manager
Select this choice to view, add, delete, or change the device boot priority, boot
from a file, select a one-time boot, or reset the boot order to the default setting.
v System Event Logs
Select this choice to enter the System Event Manager, where you can view the
error messages in the system event logs. You can use the arrow keys to move
between pages in the error log.
The system event logs contain all event and error messages that have been
generated during POST, by the systems-management interface handler, and by

Chapter 5. Configuration information and instructions 193

 the system service processor. Run the diagnostic programs to get more
information about error codes that occur. See “Running the diagnostic programs”
on page 67 for instructions on running the diagnostic programs.
Important: If the system-error LED on the front of the server is lit but there are
no other error indications, clear the IMM system-event log. Also, after you
complete a repair or correct an error, clear the IMM system-event log to turn off
the system-error LED on the front of the server.
– POST Event Viewer
Select this choice to enter the POST event viewer to view the POST error
messages.
– System Event Log
Select this choice to view the IMM system event log.
– Clear System Event Log
Select this choice to clear the IMM system event log.
v User Security
Select this choice to set, change, or clear passwords. See “Passwords” on page
195 for more information.
This choice is on the full and limited Setup utility menu.
– Power-on Password
Select this choice to set or change a power-on password. See “Power-on
password” on page 195 for more information.
– Administrator Password
Select this choice to set or change an administrator password. An
administrator password is intended to be used by a system administrator; it
limits access to the full Setup utility menu. If an administrator password is set,
the full Setup utility menu is available only if you type the administrator
password at the password prompt. For more information, see “Administrator
password” on page 196.
v Save Settings
Select this choice to save the changes that you have made in the settings.
v Restore Settings
Select this choice to cancel the changes that you have made in the settings and
restore the previous settings.
v Load Default Settings
Select this choice to cancel the changes that you have made in the settings and
restore the factory settings.
v Exit Setup
Select this choice to exit from the Setup utility. If you have not saved the
changes that you have made in the settings, you are asked whether you want to
save the changes or exit without saving them.

194 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Passwords
From the User Security menu choice, you can set, change, and delete a power-on
password and an administrator password. The User Security choice is on the full
Setup utility menu only.

If you set only a power-on password, you must type the power-on password to
complete the system startup and to have access to the full Setup utility menu.

An administrator password is intended to be used by a system administrator; it

limits access to the full Setup utility menu. If you set only an administrator
password, you do not have to type a password to complete the system startup, but
you must type the administrator password to access the Setup utility menu.

If you set a power-on password for a user and an administrator password for a
system administrator, you can type either password to complete the system startup.
A system administrator who types the administrator password has access to the full
Setup utility menu; the system administrator can give the user authority to set,
change, and delete the power-on password. A user who types the power-on
password has access to only the limited Setup utility menu; the user can set,
change, and delete the power-on password, if the system administrator has given
the user that authority.

Power-on password: If a power-on password is set, when you turn on the server,
the system startup will not be completed until you type the power-on password. You
can use any combination of up to seven characters (A - Z, a - z, and - 9) for the
password.

When a power-on password is set, you can enable the Unattended Start mode, in
which the keyboard and mouse remain locked but the operating system can start.
You can unlock the keyboard and mouse by typing the power-on password.

If you forget the power-on password, you can regain access to the server in any of
the following ways:
v If an administrator password is set, type the administrator password at the
password prompt. Start the Setup utility and reset the power-on password.
v Remove the battery from the server and then reinstall it. See “Removing the
system battery” on page 165 for instructions on removing the battery.
v Change the position of the power-on password switch (enable switch 5 of the
system board switch block (SW3)) to bypass the power-on password check (see
the following illustration).

Chapter 5. Configuration information and instructions 195

 Attention: Before you change any switch settings or moving any jumpers, turn
off the server; then, disconnect all power cords and external cables. See the
safety information that begins on page vii. Do not change settings or move
jumpers on any system-board switch or jumper blocks that are not shown in this
document.
While the server is turned off, move switch 5 of the switch block (SW3) to the On
position to enable the power-on password override. You can then start the Setup
utility and reset the power-on password. You do not have to return the switch to
the previous position.
The power-on password override jumper does not affect the administrator
password.

Administrator password: If an administrator password is set, you must type the

administrator password for access to the full Setup utility menu. You can use any
combination of up to seven characters (A - Z, a - z, and 0 - 9) for the password.

196 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
 Attention: If you set an administrator password and then forget it, there is no way
to change, override, or remove it. You must replace the system board.

Using the Boot Manager program

The Boot Manager program is a built-in, menu-driven configuration utility program
that you can use to temporarily redefine the first startup device without changing
settings in the Setup utility.

To use the Boot Manager program, complete the following steps:

1. Turn off the server.
2. Restart the server.
3. When the prompt <F12> Select Boot Device is displayed, press F12. If a
bootable USB mass storage device is installed, a submenu item (USB
Key/Disk) is displayed.
4. Use the Up arrow and Down arrow keys to select an item from the Boot
Selection Menu and press Enter.

The next time the server starts, it returns to the startup sequence that is set in the
Setup utility.

Starting the backup server firmware

The system board contains a backup copy area for the server firmware (formerly
BIOS firmware). This is a secondary copy of the server firmware that you update
only during the process of updating the server firmware. If the primary copy of the
server firmware becomes damaged, use this backup copy.

To force the server to start from the backup copy, turn off the server; then, place the
J29 jumper in the backup position (pins 2 and 3).

Use the backup copy of the server firmware until the primary copy is restored. After
the primary copy is restored, turn off the server; then, move the J29 jumper back to
the primary position (pins 1 and 2).

Using the integrated management module

The integrated management module (IMM) is a second generation of the functions
that were formerly provided by the baseboard management controller hardware. It
combines service processor functions, video controller, and (when an optional
virtual media key is installed) remote presence function in a single chip.

The IMM supports the following basic system management features:

v Environmental monitor with fan speed control for temperature, voltages, fan
failure, and power supply failure.
v Light path diagnostics LEDs indicators to report errors that occur with fans,
power supplies, microprocessor, hard disk drives, and system errors.
v DIMM error assistance. The Unified Extensible Firmware Interface (UEFI)
disables a failing DIMM that is detected during POST, and the IMM lights the
associated system error LED and the failing DIMM error LED.
v System event log (SEL).
v ROM-based IMM firmware flash updates.
v Auto Boot Failure Recovery (ABR).
v A virtual media key, which enables remote presence support (remote video,
remote keyboard/mouse, and remote storage).

Chapter 5. Configuration information and instructions 197

 v Automatic microprocessor disable on failure and restart in a two-microprocessor
configuration when one microprocessor signals an internal error.
v Nonmaskable interrupt (NMI) detection and reporting.
v Automatic Server Restart (ASR) when POST is not complete or the operating
system hangs and the operating system watchdog timer times-out. The IMM
might be configured to watch for the operating system watchdog timer and reboot
the system after a timeout, if the ASR feature is enabled. Otherwise, the IMM
allows the administrator to generate a nonmaskable interrupt (NMI) by pressing
an NMI button on the system board for an operating-system memory dump. ASR
is supported by IPMI.
v Intelligent Platform Management Interface (IPMI) Specification V2.0 and
Intelligent Platform Management Bus (IPMB) support.
v Invalid system configuration (CNFG) LED support.
v Serial port redirection over telnet or ssh.
v Serial over LAN (SOL).
v Active Energy Manager.
v Query power-supply input power.
v PECI 2 support.
v Power/reset control (power-on, hard and soft shutdown, hard and soft reset,
schedule power control).
v Alerts (in-band and out-of-band alerting, PET traps - IPMI style, SNMP, e-mail).
v Operating-system failure blue screen capture.
v Command-line interface.
v Configuration save and restore.
v PCI configuration data.
v Boot sequence manipulation.

The IMM also provides the following remote server management capabilities
through the OSA SMBridge management utility program:
v Command-line interface (IPMI Shell)
The command-line interface provides direct access to server management
functions through the IPMI 2.0 protocol. Use the command-line interface to issue
commands to control the server power, view system information, and identify the
server. You can also save one or more commands as a text file and run the file
as a script.
v Serial over LAN
Establish a Serial over LAN (SOL) connection to manage servers from a remote
location. You can remotely view and change the UEFI settings, restart the server,
identify the server, and perform other management functions. Any standard Telnet
client application can access the SOL connection.

Using the embedded hypervisor

The VMware ESXi embedded hypervisor is available on server models that come
with an installed USB embedded hypervisor flash device. The USB flash device
comes installed in the USB connector on the SAS/SATA RAID riser card (see the
following illustration). Hypervisor is virtualization software that enables multiple
operating systems to run on a host system at the same time. The USB flash device
is required to activate the hypervisor functions.

198 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
 To start using the embedded hypervisor functions, you must add the USB flash
device to the boot order in the Setup utility.

To add the USB flash device to the boot order, complete the following steps:
1. Turn on the server.

Note: Approximately 1 to 3 minutes after the server is connected to ac power,

the power-control button becomes active.
2. When the prompt <F1> Setup is displayed, press F1.
3. From the Setup utility main menu, select Boot Manager.
4. Select Add Boot Option; then, select Embedded Hypervisor. Press Enter, and
then select Esc.
5. Select Change Boot Order and then select Commit Changes; then, press
Enter.
6. Select Save Settings and then select Exit Setup.

If the embedded hypervisor flash device image becomes corrupt, you can use the
VMware Recovery CD that comes with the system to recover the flash device
image. To recover the flash device image, complete the following steps:
1. Turn on the server.

Note: Approximately 1 to 3 minutes after the server is connected to ac power,

the power-control button becomes active.
2. Insert the VMware Recovery CD into the CD or DVD drive.
3. Follow the instructions on the screen.

For additional information and instructions, see the VMware ESXi Server 31
Embedded Setup Guide at http://www.vmware.com/pdf/vi3_35/esx_3i_e/r35/
vi3_35_25_3i_setup.pdf

Using the remote presence capability and blue-screen capture

The remote presence and blue-screen capture features are integrated functions of
the integrated management module (IMM). When the optional IBM Virtual Media
Key is installed in the server, it activates the remote presence functions. The virtual
media key is required to enable the integrated remote presence and blue-screen
capture features. Without the virtual media key, you will not be able to access the
network remotely to mount or unmount drives or images on the client system.
However, you can still access the Web interface without the key.

After the virtual media key is installed in the server, it is authenticated to determine
whether it is valid. If the key is not valid, you receive a message from the Web

Chapter 5. Configuration information and instructions 199

 interface (when you attempt to start the remote presence feature) indicating that the
hardware key is required to use the remote presence feature.

The virtual media key has an LED. When this LED is lit and green, it indicates that
the key is installed and functioning correctly. When the LED is not lit, it indicates
that the key might not be installed correctly.

The remote presence feature provides the following functions:

v Remotely viewing video with graphics resolutions up to 1280 x 1024 at 75 Hz,
regardless of the system state
v Remotely accessing the server, using the keyboard and mouse from a remote
client
v Mapping the CD or DVD drive, diskette drive, and USB flash drive on a remote
client, and mapping ISO and diskette image files as virtual drives that are
available for use by the server
v Uploading a diskette image to the IMM memory and mapping it to the server as a
virtual drive

The blue-screen capture feature captures the video display contents before the IMM
restarts the server when the IMM detects an operating-system hang condition. A
system administrator can use the blue-screen capture to assist in determining the
cause of the hang condition.

Enabling the remote presence feature

To enable the remote presence feature, complete the following steps:
1. Install the virtual media key into the dedicated slot on the system board (see
“System-board optional device connectors” on page 21).
2. Turn on the server.

Note: Approximately 1 to 3 minutes after the server is connected to ac power,

the power-control button becomes active.

Obtaining the IP address for the IMM

To access the Web interface, you need the IP address for IMM. You can obtain the
IMM IP address through the Setup utility. The server comes with a default IP
address for the IMM of 192.168.70.125. To locate the IP address, complete the
following steps:
1. Turn on the server.

Note: Approximately 1 to 3 minutes after the server is connected to ac power,

the power-control button becomes active.
2. When the prompt <F1> Setup is displayed, press F1. (This prompt is displayed
on the screen for only a few seconds. You must press F1 quickly.) If you have
set both a power-on password and an administrator password, you must type
the administrator password to access the full Setup utility menu.
3. From the Setup utility main menu, select System Settings.
4. On the next screen, select Integrated Management Module.
5. On the next screen, select Network Configuration.
6. Find the IP address and write it down.
7. Exit from the Setup utility.

200 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
 Logging on to the Web interface
To log onto the Web interface to use the remote presence functions, complete the
following steps:
1. Open a Web browser and in the address or URL field, type the IP address or
host name of the IMM to which you want to connect.

Note: The IMM defaults to DHCP. If a DHCP host is not available, the IMM
assigns a static IP address of 192.168.70.125.
2. On the Login page, type the user name and password. If you are using the IMM
for the first time, you can obtain the user name and password from your system
administrator. All login attempts are documented in the event log.

Note: The IMM is set initially with a user name of USERID and password of
PASSW0RD (passw0rd with a zero, not a the letter O). You have read/write
access. You must change the default password the first time you log on.
3. On the Welcome page, type a timeout value (in minutes) in the field that is
provided. The IMM will log you off of the Web interface if your browser is
inactive for the number of minutes that you entered for the timeout value.
4. Click Continue to start the session. The System Health page provides a quick
view of the system status.

Enabling the Broadcom Gigabit Ethernet Utility program

The Broadcom Gigabit Ethernet Utility program is part of the server firmware. You
can use it to configure the network as a startable device, and you can customize
where the network startup option appears in the startup sequence. Enable and
disable the Broadcom Gigabit Ethernet Utility program from the Setup utility.

Configuring the Gigabit Ethernet controller

The Ethernet controllers are integrated on the system board. They provide an
interface for connecting to a 10 Mbps, 100 Mbps, or 1 Gbps network and provide
full-duplex (FDX) capability, which enables simultaneous transmission and reception
of data on the network. If the Ethernet ports in the server support auto-negotiation,
the controllers detect the data-transfer rate (10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX, or
1000BASE-T) and duplex mode (full-duplex or half-duplex) of the network and
automatically operate at that rate and mode.

You do not have to set any jumpers or configure the controllers. However, you must
install a device driver to enable the operating system to address the controllers. For
device drivers and information about configuring the Ethernet controllers, see the
Broadcom NetXtreme II Gigabit Ethernet Software CD that comes with the server.
To find updated information about configuring the controllers, complete the following
steps.

Note: Changes are made periodically to the IBM Web site. The actual procedure
might vary slightly from what is described in this document.
1. Go to http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/.
2. Under Product support, click System x.
3. Under Popular links, click Software and device drivers.
4. From the Product family menu, select System x3550 M2 and click Go.

Chapter 5. Configuration information and instructions 201

Using the LSI Configuration Utility program
Use the LSI Configuration Utility program to configure and manage redundant array
of independent disks (RAID) arrays. Be sure to use this program as described in
this document.
v Use the LSI Configuration Utility program to perform the following tasks:
– Perform a low-level format on a hard disk drive
– Create an array of hard disk drives with or without a hot-spare drive
– Set protocol parameters on hard disk drives

The integrated SAS/SATA controller with RAID capabilities supports RAID arrays.
You can use the LSI Configuration Utility program to configure RAID 1 (IM), RAID
1E (IME), and RAID 0 (IS) for a single pair of attached devices. If you install the
optional ServeRAID-MR10i SAS/SATA controller, it provides RAID levels 0, 1, 5, 6,
10, 50, and 60 support. If you install a different type of RAID adapter, follow the
instructions in the documentation that comes with the adapter to view or change
settings for attached devices.

In addition, you can download an LSI command-line configuration program from

http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/.

When you are using the LSI Configuration Utility program to configure and manage
arrays, consider the following information:
v The integrated SAS/SATA controller with RAID capabilities supports the following
features:
– Integrated Mirroring (IM) with hot-spare support (also known as RAID 1)
Use this option to create an integrated array of two disks plus up to two
optional hot spares. All data on the primary disk can be migrated.
– Integrated Mirroring Enhanced (IME) with hot-spare support (also known as
RAID 1E)
Use this option to create an integrated mirror enhanced array of three to eight
disks, including up to two optional hot spares. All data on the array disks will
be deleted.
– Integrated Striping (IS) (also known as RAID 0)
Use this option to create an integrated striping array of two to eight disks. All
data on the array disks will be deleted.
v Hard disk drive capacities affect how you create arrays. The drives in an array
can have different capacities, but the RAID controller treats them as if they all
have the capacity of the smallest hard disk drive.
v If you use an integrated SAS/SATA controller with RAID capabilities to configure
a RAID 1 (mirrored) array after you have installed the operating system, you will
lose access to any data or applications that were previously stored on the
secondary drive of the mirrored pair.
v If you install a different type of RAID controller, see the documentation that
comes with the controller for information about viewing and changing settings for
attached devices.

Starting the LSI Configuration Utility program

To start the LSI Configuration Utility program, complete the following steps:
1. Turn on the server.

Note: Approximately 1 to 3 minutes after the server is connected to ac power,

the power-control button becomes active.

202 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
 2. When the prompt <F1 Setup> is displayed, press F1. If you have set an
administrator password, you are prompted to type the password.
3. Select System Settings → Adapters and UEFI drivers.
4. Select Please refresh this page on the first visit and press Enter.
5. Select LSI controller_driver_name Driver and press Enter, where
controller_driver_name is the name of the SAS/SATA controller driver. For the
SAS/SATA controller driver name, see the documentation that comes with your
controller.
6. To perform storage-management tasks, follow the procedures in the
documentation that comes with the SAS/SATA controller.

When you have finished changing settings, press Esc to exit from the program;
select Save to save the settings that you have changed.

Formatting a hard disk drive

Low-level formatting removes all data from the hard disk. If there is data on the disk
that you want to save, back up the hard disk before you perform this procedure.

Note: Before you format a hard disk, make sure that the disk is not part of a
mirrored pair.

To format a drive, complete the following steps:

1. From the list of adapters, select the controller (channel) for the drive that you
want to format and press Enter.
2. Select SAS Topology and press Enter.
3. Select Direct Attach Devices and press Enter.
4. To highlight the drive that you want to format, use the Up Arrow and Down
Arrow keys. To scroll left and right, use the Left Arrow and Right Arrow keys or
the End key. Press Alt+D.
5. To start the low-level formatting operation, select Format and press Enter.

Creating a RAID array of hard disk drives

To create a RAID array of hard disk drives, complete the following steps:
1. From the list of adapters, select the controller (channel) for the drives that you
want to mirror.
2. Select RAID Properties.
3. Select the type of array that you want to create.
4. Use the arrow keys to highlight the first drive in the pair; then, press the Minus
(-) or Plus (+) key to change the mirror value to Primary.
5. Continue to select the next drive using the Minus (-) or Plus (+) key until you
have selected all the drives for your array.
6. Press C to create the disk array.
7. Select Apply changes and exit menu to create the array.

IBM Advanced Settings Utility program

The IBM Advanced Settings Utility (ASU) program is an alternative to the Setup
utility for modifying UEFI settings. Use the ASU program online or out of band to
modify UEFI settings from the command line without the need to restart the system
to access the Setup utility.

Chapter 5. Configuration information and instructions 203

 You can also use the ASU program to configure the optional remote presence
features or other IMM settings. The remote presence features provide enhanced
systems-management capabilities.

In addition, the ASU program provides limited settings for configuring the IPMI
function in the IMM through the command-line interface.

Use the command-line interface to issue setup commands. You can save any of the
settings as a file and run the file as a script. The ASU program supports scripting
environments through a batch-processing mode.

For more information and to download the ASU program, go to

http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/.

Updating IBM Systems Director

If you plan to use IBM Systems Director to manage the server, you must check for
the latest applicable IBM Systems Director updates and interim fixes.

Note: Changes are made periodically to the IBM Web site. The actual procedure
might vary slightly from what is described in this document.

To locate and install a newer version of IBM Systems Director, complete the
following steps:
1. Check for the latest version of IBM Systems Director:
a. Go to http://www.ibm.com/systems/management/director/downloads.html.
b. If a newer version of IBM Systems Director than what comes with the server
is shown in the drop-down list, follow the instructions on the Web page to
download the latest version.
2. Install the IBM Systems Director program.

If your management server is connected to the Internet, to locate and install

updates and interim fixes, complete the following steps:
1. Make sure that you have run the Discovery and Inventory collection tasks.
2. On the Welcome page of the IBM Systems Director Web interface, click View
updates.
3. Click Check for updates. The available updates are displayed in a table.
4. Select the updates that you want to install, and click Install to start the
installation wizard.

If your management server is not connected to the Internet, to locate and install
updates and interim fixes, complete the following steps:
1. Make sure that you have run the Discovery and Inventory collection tasks.
2. On a system that is connected to the Internet, go to http://www.ibm.com/
eserver/support/fixes/fixcentral/.
3. From the Product family list, select IBM Systems Director.
4. From the Product list, select IBM Systems Director.
5. From the Installed version list, select the latest version, and click Continue.
6. Download the available updates.
7. Copy the downloaded files to the management server.
8. On the management server, on the Welcome page of the IBM Systems
Director Web interface, click the Manage tab, and click Update Manager.

204 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
 9. Click Import updates and specify the location of the downloaded files that you
copied to the management server.
10. Return to the Welcome page of the Web interface, and click View updates.
11. Select the updates that you want to install, and click Install to start the
installation wizard.

Updating the Universal Unique Identifier (UUID)

The Universal Unique Identifier (UUID) must be updated when the system board is
replaced. Use the Advanced Settings Utility to update the UUID in the UEFI-based
server. The ASU is an online tool that supports several operating systems. Make
sure that you download the version for your operating system. You can download
the ASU from the IBM Web site. To download the ASU and update the UUID,
complete the following steps.

Note: Changes are made periodically to the IBM Web site. The actual procedure
might vary slightly from what is described in this document.
1. Download the Advanced Settings Utility (ASU):
a. Go to http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/.
b. Under Product support, select System x.
c. Under Popular links, select Tools and utilities.
d. In the left pane, click System x and BladeCenter Tools Center.
e. Scroll down and click Tools reference.
f. Scroll down and click the plus-sign (+) for Configuration tools to expand the
list; then, select Advanced Settings Utility (ASU).
g. In the next window under Related Information, click the Advanced Settings
Utility link and download the ASU version for your operating system.
2. ASU sets the UUID in the Integrated Management Module (IMM). Select one of
the following methods to access the Integrated Management Module (IMM) to
set the UUID:
v Online from the target system (LAN or keyboard console style (KCS) access)
v Remote access to the target system (LAN based)
v Bootable media containing ASU (LAN or KCS, depending upon the bootable
media)

Note: IBM provides a method for building a bootable media. You can create
a bootable media using the Bootable Media Creator (BoMC) application from
the Tools Center Web site. In addition, the Windows and Linux based tool kits
are also available to build a bootable media. These tool kits provide an
alternate method to creating a Windows Professional Edition or Master
Control Program (MCP) based bootable media, which will include the ASU
application.
3. Copy and unpack the ASU package, which also includes other required files, to
the server. Make sure that you unpack the ASU and the required files to the
same directory. In addition to the application executable (asu or asu64), the
following files are required:
v For Windows based operating systems:
– ibm_rndis_server_os.inf
– device.cat
v For Linux based operating systems:
– cdc_interface.sh

Chapter 5. Configuration information and instructions 205

 4. After you install ASU, use the following command syntax to set the UUID:
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SysInfoUUID <uuid_value> [access_method]
Where:
<uuid_value>
Up to 16-byte hexadecimal value assigned by you.
[access_method]
The access method that you selected to use from the following
methods:
v Online authenticated LAN access, type the command:
[host <imm_internal_ip>] [user <imm_user_id>][password
<imm_password>]
Where:
imm_internal_ip
The IMM internal LAN/USB IP address. The default value is
169.254.95.118.
imm_user_id
The IMM account (1 of 12 accounts). The default value is USERID.
imm_password
The IMM account password (1 of 12 accounts). The default value is
PASSW0RD (with a zero 0 not an O).

Note: If you do not specify any of these parameters, ASU will use the default
values. When the default values are used and ASU is unable to access the
IMM using the online authenticated LAN access method, ASU will
automatically use the unauthenticated KCS access method.
The following commands are examples of using the userid and password
default values and not using the default values:

Example that does not use the userid and password default values:
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SYsInfoUUID <uuid_value> user <user_id>
password <password>

Example that does use the userid and password default values:
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SysInfoUUID <uuid_value>
v Online KCS access (unauthenticated and user restricted):
You do not need to specify a value for access_method when you use this
access method.

Example:
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SysInfoUUID <uuid_value>
The KCS access method uses the IPMI/KCS interface. This method requires
that the IPMI driver be installed. Some operating systems have the IPMI
driver installed by default. ASU provides the corresponding mapping layer.
See the Advanced Settings Utility Users Guide for more details. You can
access the ASU Users Guide from the IBM Web site.

Note: Changes are made periodically to the IBM Web site. The actual
procedure might vary slightly from what is described in this document.
a. Go to http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/.
b. Under Product support, select System x.

206 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
 c. Under Popular links, select Tools and utilities.
d. In the left pane, click System x and BladeCenter Tools Center.
e. Scroll down and click Tools reference.
f.Scroll down and click the plus-sign (+) for Configuration tools to expand
the list; then, select Advanced Settings Utility (ASU).
g. In the next window under Related Information, click the Advanced
Settings Utility link.
v Remote LAN access, type the command:

Note: When using the remote LAN access method to access IMM using the
LAN from a client, the host and the imm_external_ip address are required
parameters.
host <imm_external_ip> [user <imm_user_id>[[password <imm_password>]
Where:
imm_external_ip
The external IMM LAN IP address. There is no default value. This
parameter is required.
imm_user_id
The IMM account (1 of 12 accounts). The default value is USERID.
imm_password
The IMM account password (1 of 12 accounts). The default value is
PASSW0RD (with a zero 0 not an O).
The following commands are examples of using the userid and password
default values and not using the default values:

Example that does not use the userid and password default values:
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SYsInfoUUID <uuid_value> host <imm_ip>
user <user_id> password <password>

Example that does use the userid and password default values:
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SysInfoUUID <uuid_value> host <imm_ip>
v Bootable media:
You can also build a bootable media using the applications available through
the Tools Center Web site at http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/toolsctr/
v1r0/index.jsp. From the left pane, click IBM System x and BladeCenter
Tools Center, then click Tool reference for the available tools.
5. Restart the server.

Updating the DMI/SMBIOS data

The Desktop Management Interface (DMI) must be updated when the system board
is replaced. Use the Advanced Settings Utility to update the DMI in the UEFI-based
server. The ASU is an online tool that supports several operating systems. Make
sure that you download the version for your operating system. You can download
the ASU from the IBM Web site. To download the ASU and update the DMI,
complete the following steps.

Note: Changes are made periodically to the IBM Web site. The actual procedure
might vary slightly from what is described in this document.
1. Download the Advanced Settings Utility (ASU):
a. Go to http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/.

Chapter 5. Configuration information and instructions 207

 b.Under Product support, select System x.
c.Under Popular links, select Tools and utilities.
d.In the left pane, click System x and BladeCenter Tools Center.
e.Scroll down and click Tools reference.
f.
Scroll down and click the plus-sign (+) for Configuration tools to expand the
list; then, select Advanced Settings Utility (ASU).
g. In the next window under Related Information, click the Advanced Settings
Utility link and download the ASU version for your operating system.
2. ASU sets the DMI in the Integrated Management Module (IMM). Select one of
the following methods to access the Integrated Management Module (IMM) to
set the DMI:
v Online from the target system (LAN or keyboard console style (KCS) access)
v Remote access to the target system (LAN based)
v Bootable media containing ASU (LAN or KCS, depending upon the bootable
media)

Note: IBM provides a method for building a bootable media. You can create
a bootable media using the Bootable Media Creator (BoMC) application from
the Tools Center Web site. In addition, the Windows and Linux based tool kits
are also available to build a bootable media. These tool kits provide an
alternate method to creating a Windows Professional Edition or Master
Control Program (MCP) based bootable media, which will include the ASU
application.
3. Copy and unpack the ASU package, which also includes other required files, to
the server. Make sure that you unpack the ASU and the required files to the
same directory. In addition to the application executable (asu or asu64), the
following files are required:
v For Windows based operating systems:
– ibm_rndis_server_os.inf
– device.cat
v For Linux based operating systems:
– cdc_interface.sh
4. After you install ASU, Type the following commands to set the DMI:

asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SysInfoProdName <m/t_model> [access_method]

asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SysInfoSerialNum <s/n> [access_method]
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SysEncloseAssetTag <asset_tag> [access_method]
Where:
<m/t_model>
The server machine type and model number. Type mtm xxxxyy, where
xxxx is the machine type and yyy is the server model number.
<s/n> The serial number on the server. Type sn zzzzzzz, where zzzzzzz is the
serial number.
<asset_method>
The server asset tag number. Type asset
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa, where
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa is the asset tag number.
[access_method]
The access method that you select to use from the following methods:

208 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v Online authenticated LAN access, type the command:
[host <imm_internal_ip>] [user <imm_user_id>][password
<imm_password>]
Where:
imm_internal_ip
The IMM internal LAN/USB IP address. The default value is
169.254.95.118.
imm_user_id
The IMM account (1 of 12 accounts). The default value is USERID.
imm_password
The IMM account password (1 of 12 accounts). The default value is
PASSW0RD (with a zero 0 not an O).

Note: If you do not specify any of these parameters, ASU will use the default
values. When the default values are used and ASU is unable to access the
IMM using the online authenticated LAN access method, ASU will
automatically use the following unauthenticated KCS access method.
The following commands are examples of using the userid and password
default values and not using the default values:

Examples that do not use the userid and password default values:
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SYsInfoProdName <m/t_model>
user <imm_user_id> password <imm_password>
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SYsInfoSerialNum <s/n> user <imm_user_id>
password <imm_password>
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SYsEncloseAssetTag <asset_tag>
user <imm_user_id> password <imm_password>

Examples that do use the userid and password default values:

asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SysInfoProdName <m/t_model>
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SysInfoSerialNum <s/n>
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SysEncloseAssetTag <asset_tag>
v Online KCS access (unauthenticated and user restricted):
You do not need to specify a value for access_method when you use this
access method.
The KCS access method uses the IPMI/KCS interface. This method requires
that the IPMI driver be installed. Some operating systems have the IPMI
driver installed by default. ASU provides the corresponding mapping layer.
See the Advanced Settings Utility Users Guide at http://www-947.ibm.com/
systems/support/supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=MIGR-55021 for more details.
The following commands are examples of using the userid and password
default values and not using the default values:

Examples that do not use the userid and password default values:
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SYsInfoProdName <m/t_model>
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SYsInfoSerialNum <s/n>
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SYsEncloseAssetTag <asset_tag>
v Remote LAN access, type the command:

Chapter 5. Configuration information and instructions 209

 Note: When using the remote LAN access method to access IMM using the
LAN from a client, the host and the imm_external_ip address are required
parameters.
host <imm_external_ip> [user <imm_user_id>[[password <imm_password>]
Where:
imm_external_ip
The external IMM LAN IP address. There is no default value. This
parameter is required.
imm_user_id
The IMM account (1 of 12 accounts). The default value is USERID.
imm_password
The IMM account password (1 of 12 accounts). The default value is
PASSW0RD (with a zero 0 not an O).
The following commands are examples of using the userid and password
default values and not using the default values:

Examples that do not use the userid and password default values:
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SYsInfoProdName <m/t_model> host <imm_ip>
user <imm_user_id> password <imm_password>
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SYsInfoSerialNum <s/n> host <imm_ip>
user <imm_user_id> password <imm_password>
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SYsEncloseAssetTag <asset_tag> host <imm_ip>
user <imm_user_id> password <imm_password>

Examples that do use the userid and password default values:

asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SysInfoProdName <m/t_model> host <imm_ip>
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SysInfoSerialNum <s/n> host <imm_ip>
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SysEncloseAssetTag <asset_tag> host <imm_ip>
v Bootable media:
You can also build a bootable media using the applications available through
the Tools Center Web site at http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/toolsctr/
v1r0/index.jsp. From the left pane, click IBM System x and BladeCenter
Tools Center, then click Tool reference for the available tools.
5. Restart the server.

210 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Appendix A. Getting help and technical assistance
If you need help, service, or technical assistance or just want more information
about IBM products, you will find a wide variety of sources available from IBM to
assist you. This section contains information about where to go for additional
information about IBM and IBM products, what to do if you experience a problem
with your system, and whom to call for service, if it is necessary.

Before you call

Before you call, make sure that you have taken these steps to try to solve the
problem yourself:
v Check all cables to make sure that they are connected.
v Check the power switches to make sure that the system and any optional
devices are turned on.
v Use the troubleshooting information in your system documentation, and use the
diagnostic tools that come with your system. Information about diagnostic tools is
in the Problem Determination and Service Guide on the IBM Documentation CD
that comes with your system.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check
for technical information, hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a
request for information.

You can solve many problems without outside assistance by following the
troubleshooting procedures that IBM provides in the online help or in the
documentation that is provided with your IBM product. The documentation that
comes with IBM systems also describes the diagnostic tests that you can perform.
Most systems, operating systems, and programs come with documentation that
contains troubleshooting procedures and explanations of error messages and error
codes. If you suspect a software problem, see the documentation for the operating
system or program.

Using the documentation

Information about your IBM system and preinstalled software, if any, or optional
device is available in the documentation that comes with the product. That
documentation can include printed documents, online documents, readme files, and
help files. See the troubleshooting information in your system documentation for
instructions for using the diagnostic programs. The troubleshooting information or
the diagnostic programs might tell you that you need additional or updated device
drivers or other software. IBM maintains pages on the World Wide Web where you
can get the latest technical information and download device drivers and updates.
To access these pages, go to http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ and follow the
instructions. Also, some documents are available through the IBM Publications
Center at http://www.ibm.com/shop/publications/order/.

Getting help and information from the World Wide Web

On the World Wide Web, the IBM Web site has up-to-date information about IBM
systems, optional devices, services, and support. The address for IBM System x®
and xSeries® information is http://www.ibm.com/systems/x/. The address for IBM
BladeCenter® information is http://www.ibm.com/systems/bladecenter/. The address
for IBM IntelliStation® information is http://www.ibm.com/intellistation/.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009 211

 You can find service information for IBM systems and optional devices at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/.

Software service and support

Through IBM Support Line, you can get telephone assistance, for a fee, with usage,
configuration, and software problems with System x and xSeries servers,
BladeCenter products, IntelliStation workstations, and appliances. For information
about which products are supported by Support Line in your country or region, see
http://www.ibm.com/services/sl/products/.

For more information about Support Line and other IBM services, see
http://www.ibm.com/services/, or see http://www.ibm.com/planetwide/ for support
telephone numbers. In the U.S. and Canada, call 1-800-IBM-SERV
(1-800-426-7378).

Hardware service and support

You can receive hardware service through your IBM reseller or IBM Services. To
locate a reseller authorized by IBM to provide warranty service, go to
http://www.ibm.com/partnerworld/ and click Find a Business Partner on the right
side of the page. For IBM support telephone numbers, see http://www.ibm.com/
planetwide/. In the U.S. and Canada, call 1-800-IBM-SERV (1-800-426-7378).

In the U.S. and Canada, hardware service and support is available 24 hours a day,
7 days a week. In the U.K., these services are available Monday through Friday,
from 9 a.m. to 6 p.m.

IBM Taiwan product service

IBM Taiwan product service contact information:

IBM Taiwan Corporation
3F, No 7, Song Ren Rd.
Taipei, Taiwan
Telephone: 0800-016-888

212 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Appendix B. Notices
This information was developed for products and services offered in the U.S.A.

IBM may not offer the products, services, or features discussed in this document in
other countries. Consult your local IBM representative for information on the
products and services currently available in your area. Any reference to an IBM
product, program, or service is not intended to state or imply that only that IBM
product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product,
program, or service that does not infringe any IBM intellectual property right may be
used instead. However, it is the user’s responsibility to evaluate and verify the
operation of any non-IBM product, program, or service.

IBM may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter
described in this document. The furnishing of this document does not give you any
license to these patents. You can send license inquiries, in writing, to:
IBM Director of Licensing
IBM Corporation
North Castle Drive
Armonk, NY 10504-1785
U.S.A.

INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION PROVIDES THIS

PUBLICATION “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or
implied warranties in certain transactions, therefore, this statement may not apply to
you.

This information could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors.

Changes are periodically made to the information herein; these changes will be
incorporated in new editions of the publication. IBM may make improvements and/or
changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s) described in this publication at any
time without notice.

Any references in this information to non-IBM Web sites are provided for
convenience only and do not in any manner serve as an endorsement of those
Web sites. The materials at those Web sites are not part of the materials for this
IBM product, and use of those Web sites is at your own risk.

IBM may use or distribute any of the information you supply in any way it believes
appropriate without incurring any obligation to you.

Trademarks
IBM, the IBM logo, and ibm.com are trademarks or registered trademarks of
International Business Machines Corporation in the United States, other countries,
or both. If these and other IBM trademarked terms are marked on their first
occurrence in this information with a trademark symbol (® or ™), these symbols
indicate U.S. registered or common law trademarks owned by IBM at the time this
information was published. Such trademarks may also be registered or common law
trademarks in other countries. A current list of IBM trademarks is available on the
Web at “Copyright and trademark information” at http://www.ibm.com/legal/
copytrade.shtml.
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009 213
 Adobe and PostScript are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe
Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.

Cell Broadband Engine is a trademark of Sony Computer Entertainment, Inc., in the

United States, other countries, or both and is used under license therefrom.

Intel, Intel Xeon, Itanium, and Pentium are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries.

Java and all Java-based trademarks are trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc., in
the United States, other countries, or both.

Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the United States, other

countries, or both.

Microsoft, Windows, and Windows NT are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in

the United States, other countries, or both.

UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group in the United States and other
countries.

Other company, product, or service names may be trademarks or service marks of

others.

Important notes
Processor speed indicates the internal clock speed of the microprocessor; other
factors also affect application performance.

CD or DVD drive speed is the variable read rate. Actual speeds vary and are often
less than the possible maximum.

When referring to processor storage, real and virtual storage, or channel volume,
KB stands for 1024 bytes, MB stands for 1 048 576 bytes, and GB stands for
1 073 741 824 bytes.

When referring to hard disk drive capacity or communications volume, MB stands

for 1 000 000 bytes, and GB stands for 1 000 000 000 bytes. Total user-accessible
capacity can vary depending on operating environments.

Maximum internal hard disk drive capacities assume the replacement of any
standard hard disk drives and population of all hard disk drive bays with the largest
currently supported drives that are available from IBM.

Maximum memory might require replacement of the standard memory with an

optional memory module.

IBM makes no representation or warranties regarding non-IBM products and

services that are ServerProven®, including but not limited to the implied warranties
of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. These products are offered
and warranted solely by third parties.

IBM makes no representations or warranties with respect to non-IBM products.

Support (if any) for the non-IBM products is provided by the third party, not IBM.

214 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
 Some software might differ from its retail version (if available) and might not include
user manuals or all program functionality.

Electronic emission notices

Federal Communications Commission (FCC) statement

Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the
equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates,
uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause
harmful interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the
interference at his own expense.

Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in order to
meet FCC emission limits. IBM is not responsible for any radio or television
interference caused by using other than recommended cables and connectors or by
unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or
modifications could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.

Industry Canada Class A emission compliance statement

This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.

Avis de conformité à la réglementation d’Industrie Canada

Cet appareil numérique de la classe A est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du
Canada.

Australia and New Zealand Class A statement

Attention: This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may
cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate
measures.

United Kingdom telecommunications safety requirement

Notice to Customers

This apparatus is approved under approval number NS/G/1234/J/100003 for indirect

connection to public telecommunication systems in the United Kingdom.

European Union EMC Directive conformance statement

This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EU Council
Directive 2004/108/EC on the approximation of the laws of the Member States
relating to electromagnetic compatibility. IBM cannot accept responsibility for any
failure to satisfy the protection requirements resulting from a nonrecommended
modification of the product, including the fitting of non-IBM option cards.

Appendix B. Notices 215

 This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for Class A
Information Technology Equipment according to CISPR 22/European Standard EN
55022. The limits for Class A equipment were derived for commercial and industrial
environments to provide reasonable protection against interference with licensed
communication equipment.

Attention: This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may

cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate
measures.

European Community contact:

IBM Technical Regulations
Pascalstr. 100, Stuttgart, Germany 70569
Telephone: 0049 (0)711 785 1176
Fax: 0049 (0)711 785 1283
E-mail: [email protected]

Taiwanese Class A warning statement

Chinese Class A warning statement

Japanese Voluntary Control Council for Interference (VCCI) statement

216 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Korean Class A warning statement

Appendix B. Notices 217

218 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Index
A checkpoint codes 38
checkpoint codes display
ABR, automatic boot failure recovery 106
on the light path diagnostics panel display 57
ac good LED 65
Class A electronic emission notice 215
ac power LED 12
code updates 2
acoustical noise emissions 8
collecting data 1
adapter
components
PCI Express bus 126
on the server 112
PCI-X bus 126
configuration
remote battery
ServerGuide Setup and Installation CD 187
installing 163
Setup utility 187
removing 162
configuration programs
removing the ServeRAID-BR10i SAS/SATA 144
LSI Configuration Utility 188
replacing 126
configuring
adapter, installation 127
with ServerGuide 190
adapter, ServeRAID-MR10i SAS/SATA
configuring hardware 187
installing 148
configuring your server 187
removing 147
connector
administrator password 194
Ethernet 13
assertion event, system-event log 25
Ethernet systems-management 13
assistance, getting 211
power supply 12
attention notices 6
serial 13
automatic boot failure recovery (ABR) 106
USB 9, 13
video
front 9
B rear 13
backplane, hot-swap SAS/SATA connectors
removing 171 external 17
baseboard management controller 15 internal 16
battery, replacing 167 option, on system board 21
battery, system rear 12
installing 167 consumable parts 114
replacing 165 controllers
bays 8 Ethernet 201
bezel controls and LEDs
removing 169 on the light path diagnostics panel 11
blue-screen capture feature on the operator information panel 10
overview 200 cover
boot failure, three consecutive 106 installing 122
Boot Manager program 188, 197 removing 122
Broadcom Gigabit Ethernet Utility program creating
enabling 201 a RAID array 203
button, presence detection 10 CRUs, replacing
adapter 126
CD or DVD drive 133
C cover 122
caution statements 6 DIMMs 139
CD drive memory 139
installing 137 system battery 165
problems 39 customer replaceable units (CRUs) 111
removing 136
replacing 133
CD/DVD D
drive activity LED 9 danger statements 6
eject button 9 data collection 1
CD/DVD drive dc good LED 65
installing 134 dc power LED 12
checkout procedure 37 deassertion event, system-event log 25

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009 219

diagnosing a problem 1 errors
diagnostic format, diagnostic code 68
error codes 68 power supply LEDs 65
on-board programs, starting 67 Ethernet
programs, overview 66 controller
test log, viewing 68 troubleshooting 107
text message format 68 link status LED 13
tools, overview 23 systems-management connector 13
diagnostic event log 25 Ethernet activity
DIMM installation sequence LED 10, 13
for memory mirroring 142 Ethernet connector 13
DIMMs Ethernet controller configuration 188
removing 139 event log. viewing through the web interface 25
display area event logs 25
on the light path diagnostics panel 57 event logs, methods for viewing 26
display problems 48 event lot, POST 25
drive, CD/DVD event lot, system 25
installing 137 expansion bays 8
removing 136
DVD drive
installing 137 F
problems 39 fan
removing 136 replacing 155
replacing 133 fans
DVD drive, installing 134 size 8
weight 8
FCC Class A notice 215
E features 7
electrical input 8 ServerGuide 189
electronic emission Class A notice 215 field replaceable units (FRUs) 111
embedded hypervisor firmware, server
using 198 starting the backup 197
enclosure manager heartbeat firmware, server, recovering 104
LED 66 firmware, server, updating 179
environment 8 firmware, updating 187
error codes and messages formatting
diagnostic 68 a hard disk drive 203
messages, diagnostic 66 FRUs, replacing
POST 27 the ServeRAID-BR10i SAS/SATA adapter 144
error logs
clearing 27
viewing 25 G
error symptoms getting help 211
CD drive, DVD drive 39 grease, thermal 181
general 40
hard disk drive 40
hypervisor flash device 43 H
intermittent 43 hard disk drive
keyboard, non-USB 44 formatting 203
memory 46 hot-swap SATA 131
microprocessor 47 problems 40
monitor 48 SAS 131
mouse, non-USB 44 SCSI
optional devices 50 See SAS
pointing device, non-USB 44 hard disk drive activity LED 9
power 51 hard disk drive status LED 9
serial port 53 hard disk drive, installing (hot-swap 2.5-inch) 132
ServerGuide 53 hard drive activity
software 54 LED 10
USB port 55 hardware service and support 212
hardware, configuring 187

220 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
heat output 8 intermittent problems 43
heat sink internal connectors 16
installing 178 IP address
heat sink retention module obtaining for the IMM 200
installing 183 IPMI, overview 26
removing 182 IPMItool 26
help, getting 211
hot-swap
fans, replacing 155 J
hot-swap disk drive, installing 2.5-inch 132 jumper
hot-swap drive UEFI boot recovery 104
SAS/SATA IDs 133 jumpers 18
hot-swap SAS/SATA backplane
installing 172
replacing 171 K
humidity 8 key, virtual media
hypervisor flash device installing 158
problems 43 keyboard problems 44
hypervisor flash devicer
installing 151
L
LED
I ac power 12
IBM Advanced Settings Utility program CD/DVD drive activity 9
overview 203 dc power 12
IBM Support Line 212 Ethernet activity 10
IBM Systems Director Ethernet-link status 13
updating 204 for Ethernet activity 13
IDs for SAS/SATA hot-swap drives 133 hard disk drive activity 9
IMM 188, 197 hard disk drive status 9
IMM heartbeat hard drive activity 10
LED 66 integrated management module 66
important notices 6 location 9
installation guidelines 119 power-on 10
installing rear 13
2.5-inch hot-swap hard disk drive 132 system information 10
a heat sink 178 system locator 10
a hot-swap fan 155 system-error 10
a microprocessor 178 rear 13
a RAID adapter remote battery 163 system-locator
an optical CD/DVD drive 134 rear 13
battery,system 167 LED errors
cover 122 power supply 65
hypervisor flash device 151 LED,
memory DIMMs 139 enclosure manager heartbeat 66
operator-information panel 174 IMM heartbeat 66
the CD/DVD cable 137 LEDs, system pulse 66
the heat sink 180 light panel diagnostics panel
the heat sink retention module 183 location 9
the hot-swap SAS/SATA backplane 172 light path diagnostics 55
the PCI riser card bracket 161 LEDs 58
the safety cover 176 panel 56
the ServeRAID-BR10i SAS/SATA adapter 145 light path diagnostics LEDs 58
the ServeRAID-MR10i SAS/SATA adapter 148 light path diagnostics panel
the system board 185 checkpoint code display 57
the virtual media key 158 controls and LEDs 11
integrated functions 8 NMI button 12, 57
integrated management module light path diagnostics panel display
LED 66 checkpoint codes 57
using 197 log, event, viewing through the web interface 25
Integrated Management Module programs 188

Index 221
LSI Configuration Utility program
starting 202
P
parts listing 111, 113
using 202
parts, consumable 114
password 195
administrator 195
M power-on 195
memory PCI
installing 139 riser card bracket 161
removing 139 riser-card assembly 170, 171
specifications 8 slot 1 12
memory installation sequence slot 2 12
for non-mirroring mode 140 PCI expansion slots 8
memory mirroring PCI riser card bracket
description 141 installing 161
DIMM population sequence 142 PCI riser slots
memory problems 46 installation configurations 127
menu choices supported configurations 128
for the Setup utility 191 POST
messages error codes 27
diagnostic 66 error log 25
messages, error POST event log 25
POST 27 power
methods, for viewing event logs 26 power-control button 10
microprocessor power-on LED 13
installing 178 server 13
problems 47 specifications 8
specifications 8 supply 8
mirroring mode 141 power cords 116
monitor problems 48 power problems 51, 107
power supply LED errors 65
power-on
N LED
NMI button rear 13
on the light path diagnostics panel 12, 57 power-on LED 10
NOS installation power-on password 194
with ServerGuide 190 presence detection button 10
without ServerGuide 190 problem isolation tables 39
notes 6 problem, diagnosing 1
notes, important 214 problems
notices 213 CD/DVD drive 39
electronic emission 215 Ethernet controller 107
FCC, Class A 215 hard disk drive 40
notices and statements 6 hypervisor flash device 43
intermittent 43
memory 46
O microprocessor 47
obtaining monitor 48
the IP address for IMM 200 mouse 44, 45
online publications 6, 104 optional devices 50
online service request 4 pointing device 45
operator information panel power 51, 107
controls and LEDs 10 serial port 53
removing 173, 174 software 54
operator information panel release latch 9 undetermined 108
optical drive USB port 55
specifications 8 video 48, 55
optional device problems 50 publications 5
order of installation
for non-mirroring mode 140

222 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide
R serial connector 13
serial port problems 53
rack release latches 9
Server
RAID
power features 13
riser-card assembly 129, 130
server components 112
RAID array
server firmware
creating 203
updating 179
rear view 12
server firmware, recovering 104
recovering the server firmware 104
server replaceable units 111
redundant array of independent disks (RAID)
server, backup firmware
adapter 133
starting 197
remind button 11, 57
ServeRAID SAS/SATA adapter
remote battery, RAID adapter
installing 145
installing 163
ServerGuide
removing 162
features 189
remote presence feature
NOS installation 190
using 199
setup 190
Remote presence support 188
Setup and Installation CD 187
removing
using 189
a hot-swap fan 155
service bulletins 3
a RAID adapter remote battery 162
service request, online 4
adapter 126
Setup utility 187, 191
battery, system 165
menu choices 191
CD or DVD drive 133
starting 191
connector 158
using 191
DIMM 139
shutdown 14
hypervisor 150
slots
PCI riser card bracket 161
PCI expansion 8
the bezel 169
software problems 54
the CD/DVD cable 136
software service and support 212
the heat sink retention module 182
specifications 7
the hot-swap SAS/SATA backplane 171
standby mode 13
the safety cover 175
start here
the ServeRAID-BR10i SAS/SATA adapter 144
troubleshooting procedures 1
the ServeRAID-MR10i SAS/SATA adapter 147
starting
removing/replacing
the LSI Configuration Utility program 202
operator information panel 173, 174
the server firmware 197
the system board 183
the Setup utility 191
replacement parts 111
statements and notices 6
replacing
support, web site 211
battery, system 165, 167
SW3 switch block description 19
CD or DVD drive 133
switch block 19
the SAS/SATA backplane 171
switches and jumpers 18
reset button 12, 57
system
retention module, heat sink
error LED front 10
installing 183
locator LED front 10
removing 182
system-error LED
riser card
rear 13
connector location 16
System
riser-card assembly
information LED 10
location 126
system board
installing 185
internal connectors 16
S jumper blocks 18
safety cover removing 183
installing 176 switches and jumpers 18
removing 175 system event logs 25
SAS/SATA system pulse LEDs 66
IDs for hot-swap drives 133 system-event log 25
SAS/SATA controller system-event log, assertion event 25
hypervisor 150 system-event log, deassertion event 25

Index 223
system-locator virtual media key
LED installing 158
rear 13 VMware Hypervisor support 188
systems-management
Ethernet connector 13
W
Wake on LAN feature 14
T web site
telephone numbers 212 publication ordering 211
temperature 8 support 211
test log, viewing 68 support line, telephone numbers 212
thermal grease 181 Web site
three boot failure 106 UEFI flash diskette 104
TOE 8
tools, diagnostic 23
trademarks 213
troubleshooting procedures 4
start here 1
turning off the server 14
baseboard management controller 15
turning on the server 14

U
UEFI
boot recovery jumper 104
undetermined problems 108
undocumented problems 4
United States electronic emission Class A notice 215
United States FCC Class A notice 215
Universal Serial Bus (USB) problems 55
UpdateXpress 2
updating
IBM Systems Director 204
server firmware 179
Systems Director, IBM 204
updating firmware 187
USB
connector 9, 13
using
embedded hypervisor 198
IMM 197
the integrated management module 197
the LSI Configuration Utility program 202
the remote presence feature 199
the Setup utility 191
utility
Setup 191
Utility program
IBM Advanced Settings 203
utility, Setup 187

V
video connector
front 9
rear 13
video controller, integrated
specifications 8
video problems 48
viewing event logs 25

224 IBM System x3550 M2 Type 7946: Problem Determination and Service Guide



Part Number: 40M2493

Printed in USA

(1P) P/N: 40M2493